JP7623977B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the display of identification information is variably performed.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which the manner in which the variable display of identification information changes depending on the number of consecutive jackpots (see Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, when the number of consecutive jackpots exceeds a predetermined number, the frequency with which the manner in which the variable display of identification information in which a predetermined enemy character appears is selected increases.

JP 2016-116678 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, the gameplay does not change after the number of consecutive jackpots exceeds a predetermined number compared to before the number of consecutive jackpots exceeds the predetermined number, which may result in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.
An object of the present invention is to increase a player's interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the first invention comprises a gaming judgment means for executing a gaming judgment, a display control means for executing a variable display of identification information according to a variable time corresponding to the result of the gaming judgment, and a specific gaming state control means for generating a specific gaming state in which a specified ball entrance is opened and closed , and is characterized in that when the consecutive number of times of the specific gaming state reaches a specified number, a shorter variable time is more likely to be selected compared to before the consecutive number of times of the specific gaming state reached the specified number , and the frequency of appearance of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is increased, and the advantageous information is information suggesting the number of prize balls that the player is expected to win through multiple occurrences of the specific gaming state.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, a shorter variable time is more likely to be selected than before the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches the predetermined number. This makes it possible to speed up the progress of the game after the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, compared to before the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.
Here, if the configuration only makes it easier for a shorter variable time to be selected when the number of consecutive occurrences of a specific game state reaches a predetermined number, compared to before the number of consecutive occurrences of a specific game state reaches the predetermined number, it may be possible to increase interest in the game, but there is a risk that it may not be possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the frequency of appearance of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player increases compared to before the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reached the predetermined number. As a result, after the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches the predetermined number, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the player's sense of expectation increases compared to before the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reached the predetermined number, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.
Here, the game judgment corresponds to a start judgment, which will be described later. The game judgment means corresponds to the main control board 200 (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11), which will be described later. The identification information corresponds to special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), which will be described later. The display control means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S11-13), which will be described later. The specific game state corresponds to a jackpot game state, which will be described later. The specific game state control means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S13-4), which will be described later. The consecutive number of times corresponds to the consecutive number of times, which will be described later. The advantageous information corresponds to a special bonus display, which will be described later.

The present invention makes it possible to increase a player's interest in the game.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and diagrammatically illustrates parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities for various lotteries. A diagram showing the types of winnings in a regular pattern lottery. A diagram showing the types of winnings in the special pattern lottery. A diagram showing the transition of game states. 13 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 13 is a flowchart showing a save process at the time of power interruption. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dynamic port output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Figure 1. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. 13 is a flowchart showing a number-of-times cutoff management process; A flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped. A flowchart showing the processing before opening the first large prize opening. A flowchart showing the first large prize opening opening control process. A flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure activation process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the first large prize opening. A flowchart showing the processing before opening the second large prize opening. A flowchart showing the second large prize opening opening control process. A flowchart showing the second large prize winning port closure activation process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the second large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing special electric service opening/closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric devices. 13 is a flowchart showing normal electric utility opening and closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric device opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 31a. A figure showing the type of variation pattern table selected for the variation display of special patterns that is executed after the end of a jackpot game state. A diagram showing the types of bonus displays that are executed when a special pattern lottery is won.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is composed of an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the front frame unit 4 are fixed to one another via a hinge mechanism, which allows the inner frame unit 3 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame unit 2. The front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed relative to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to an island facility of an amusement facility.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The front frame unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and has a transparent plate 4a disposed in the approximate center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a receiving tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a launch handle 6 disposed to the side of the receiving tray unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. At each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b, a sound hole 4c is provided in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound hole 4c is provided with a plurality of sound holes that pass through the sound output by the speaker 22. In addition, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 has a tray 5a for receiving game balls (loan balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed in front of the tray 5a.
The performance button 5b is formed in a generally cylindrical shape and is arranged so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The performance button 5b can be pressed (pushed downward) by the player. A first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of the performance button 5b is arranged inside the tray unit 5. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the performance control board 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the performance button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the performance button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated around the cylindrical axis). A second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed inside the tray unit 5. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the performance control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

A loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicatively connected to a CR unit (not shown) that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit is displayed on the point display device 7c.
In addition, when the ball loan button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining points of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, the prepaid card may be, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.
The launch handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A launch volume 410 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the launch handle 6 to detect the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated. The launch volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
Fig. 2 shows the front of the game board, and is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part particularly necessary for explanation. Fig. 44 shows an example of the display screen 31a.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the rear side of the front frame unit 4. The player can view the game board 11 (play area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the rear side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front side of the game board 11, through which game balls flow down when the launch handle 6 is rotated. In the game area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths through which the game balls flow down.
Furthermore, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the rear side of the set board. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, etc. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying a performance image.
As shown in Figure 44, the display screen 31a can be configured to have the following display areas for identification information for performance: special chart mini pattern display area A1, special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, regular chart mini pattern display area A4, regular chart fourth pattern display area A5, and main performance pattern display area A6.

The special mini pattern display area A1 is configured to include three special pattern display areas (not shown). In each special pattern display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special mini performance pattern a1. Each special mini performance pattern a1 is a pattern for performance, and is configured to include identification information (pattern) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of special mini performance patterns a1 (special mini performance patterns a1 that display each identification information of "1" to "9") are specified.
In the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2. The special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is a pattern for performance, and is composed of identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of special chart 1 fourth performance patterns a2 (special chart 1 fourth performance patterns a2 that display each identification information of "◯" and "×") are specified.
In the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3. The special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is a pattern for performance, and is configured to include identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of special chart 2 fourth performance patterns a3 (special chart 2 fourth performance patterns a3 that display each identification information of "◯" and "×") are specified.

In the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2, a display is executed to notify the result of the first special pattern lottery described later. Then, the result of the first special pattern lottery is notified by a combination of the three special mini performance patterns a1 stopped and displayed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 1 fourth performance pattern a2 stopped and displayed in the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2.
That is, the variable display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2 corresponds to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the special 1 display device described later. Also, the stop display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2 corresponds to the stop display of the first special pattern executed in the special 1 display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the first special pattern in the special pattern 1 display device, the variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the variable display of the special pattern 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is executed in the special pattern 1 fourth pattern display area A2. Also, during the stopped display of the first special pattern in the special pattern 1 display device, the stopped display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the first special pattern, and the stopped display of the special pattern 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is executed in the special pattern 1 fourth pattern display area A2.
In this case, the display of the first special pattern on the special chart 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1, a2 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are respectively associated with the time when the changing display starts, the content of the changing display, the time when the changing display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 refers to a display in which the type of the special mini performance pattern a1 displayed in each special display area of the special mini pattern display area A1 is changed sequentially, and the type of the special 1 fourth pattern a2 displayed in the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2 is changed sequentially. Also, the stop display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 refers to a display in which one type of special mini performance pattern a1 is stopped in each special display area of the special mini pattern display area A1, and one type of special 1 fourth pattern a2 is stopped in the special 1 fourth pattern display area A2.

In the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3, a display is executed to notify the result of the second special pattern lottery, which will be described later. Then, the result of the second special pattern lottery is notified by a combination of the three special mini performance patterns a1 stopped and displayed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 2 fourth performance pattern a3 stopped and displayed in the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
That is, the variable display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3 corresponds to the variable display of the second special pattern executed in the special pattern 2 display device described later. Also, the stop display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 and the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3 corresponds to the stop display of the second special pattern executed in the special pattern 2 display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the second special pattern in the special pattern 2 display device, the variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and the variable display of the special pattern 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is executed in the special pattern 2 fourth pattern display area A3. Also, during the stopped display of the second special pattern in the special pattern 2 display device, the stopped display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the second special pattern, and the stopped display of the special pattern 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is executed in the special pattern 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
In this case, the display of the second special pattern on the special chart 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1, a3 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are respectively associated with the time when the changing display starts, the content of the changing display, the time when the changing display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 refers to a display in which the type of the special mini performance pattern a1 displayed in each special display area of the special mini pattern display area A1 is changed sequentially, and the type of the special 2 fourth pattern a3 displayed in the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3 is changed sequentially. Also, the stop display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 refers to a display in which one type of special mini performance pattern a1 is stopped in each special display area of the special mini pattern display area A1, and one type of special 2 fourth pattern a3 is stopped in the special 2 fourth pattern display area A3.

The regular mini pattern display area A4 is configured to include three regular pattern display areas (not shown). In each regular pattern display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of regular mini performance patterns a4. Each regular mini performance pattern a4 is a pattern for performance, and is configured to include identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of regular mini performance patterns a4 (regular mini performance patterns a4 that display each identification information of "1" to "9") are specified.
In the normal 4th pattern display area A5, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the normal 4th performance pattern a5. The normal 4th performance pattern a5 is a pattern for performance, and is composed of identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of normal 1st 4th performance patterns a5 (normal 4th performance patterns a5 that display each identification information of "◯" and "×") are specified.

In the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5, a display is executed to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery, which will be described later. Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified by the combination of the three normal mini performance symbols a4 stopped and displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth performance symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the normal fourth symbol display area A5.
That is, the variable display of the performance patterns a4 and a5 executed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 corresponds to the variable display of the normal pattern executed in the normal display device described later. Also, the stop display of the performance patterns a4 and a5 executed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 corresponds to the stop display of the normal pattern executed in the normal display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the normal pattern in the normal map display device, the variable display of the normal map mini performance pattern a4 is executed in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), and the variable display of the normal map fourth performance pattern a5 is executed in the normal map fourth pattern display area A5. Also, during the stop display of the normal pattern in the normal map display device, the stop display of the normal map mini performance pattern a4 is executed in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), and the stop display of the normal map fourth performance pattern a5 is executed in the normal map fourth pattern display area A5.
In this case, the display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device and the display of the performance patterns a4, a5 in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 and the normal map fourth pattern display area A5 correspond to the time when the variable display starts, the content of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the performance symbols a4 and a5 refers to a display in which the type of the regular mini performance symbol a4 displayed in each special display area of the regular mini pattern display area A4 is changed sequentially, and the type of the regular fourth pattern a5 displayed in the regular fourth pattern display area A5 is changed sequentially. Also, the stop display of the performance symbols a4 and a5 refers to a display in which one type of regular mini performance symbol a4 is stopped in each special display area of the regular mini pattern display area A4, and one type of regular fourth pattern a5 is stopped in the regular fourth pattern display area A5.

The main performance symbol display area A6 is configured to include three performance symbol display areas (not shown). In each performance symbol display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stationary display of the main performance symbol a6. Each main performance symbol a6 is a symbol for performance, and is configured to include identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of main performance symbols a6 (main performance symbols a6 that display each identification information of "1" to "9") are specified.
In the main performance symbol display area A6, a display for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is executed. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by a combination of three main performance symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main performance symbol display area A6.
That is, the change display of the main performance pattern a6 executed in the main performance pattern display area A6 corresponds to the change display of the special mini performance pattern a1 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1. Also, the stop display of the main performance pattern a6 executed in the main performance pattern display area A6 corresponds to the stop display of the special mini performance pattern a1 executed in the special mini pattern display area A1.
Specifically, during the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) in the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device), the variable display of the main performance pattern a6 is executed in the main performance pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern. In other words, during the variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1, the variable display of the main performance pattern a6 is executed in the main performance pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1. Also, during the stop display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) in the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device), the stop display of the main performance pattern a6 is executed in the main performance pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stop display of the special pattern. In other words, while the special mini performance pattern a1 is displayed in a stopped state, the main performance pattern a6 is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the special mini performance pattern a1.

In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured to have a pre-change pending pattern display area B1 and a changing pending pattern display area B2 as display areas related to pending.
In the pre-change reserved pattern display area B1, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern game information (special pattern 1 game information or special pattern 2 game information) before the special pattern hit judgment (start judgment) is executed (before the first special pattern change display is started) are displayed. In addition, in the changing reserved pattern display area B2, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern game information (special pattern 1 game information or special pattern 2 game information) after the special pattern hit judgment (start judgment) is executed (during the special pattern change display/stop display is being executed) are displayed.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

The left side path is provided with a first starting opening 51. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left side path to enter (game balls flowing down the right side path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

To the left of the first starting opening 51 on the left side path, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left other winning opening 57b, and a lower left other winning opening 57c. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c allows game balls that flow down the left side path to enter (game balls that flow down the right side path cannot enter).
A left winning hole switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the game board 11. The left winning hole switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the other winning holes 57a to 57c (entry of a game ball into the other winning holes 57a to 57c). In response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize ball.

At the most upstream of the right path, a large prize opening 55 is provided. The large prize opening 55 is provided with a special electric device (special electric device) 55a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 55 and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 55.
The special electric device 55a is opened and closed by a special electric device solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special electric device 55a is normally closed, making it impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 55, but when a small win game state or a large win game state occurs, the special electric device 55a is opened, making it possible (easy) for game balls to enter. The large prize opening 55 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left path to enter).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the large prize opening 55. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the large prize opening 55 (entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 55). In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize ball.
In addition, within the large prize opening 55 there are provided a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a distribution means (not shown) that distributes a game ball that enters the large prize opening 55 to either the V area or the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the V-area. The V-area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V-area (passage of the V-area by a game ball). In response to input of the detection signal from the V-area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in a V winning flag area of a RAM 230 described later.
The distribution means can be switched between a V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the V region, and a non-V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the discharge region.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the V region. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 to pass through the discharge region.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-zone solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball that enters the big prize opening 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed to either the V area or the discharge area by the distribution means, and after passing through the area, is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game ball distributed to the V area is detected by the V area switch 110.

A second starting hole 52 is provided downstream of the big winning hole 55 on the right path. The second starting hole 52 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 52a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.
The normal electric device 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric device solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed, making it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter, but when a normal winning game state occurs, the normal electric device 52a is opened, making it possible for a game ball to enter. The second starting port 52 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (game balls flowing down the left path cannot enter).
A special symbol 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second start port 52. The special symbol 2 start port switch 102 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 start port switch 102.

A start gate 41 is provided downstream of the second start port 52 on the right-side path. The start gate 41 is formed to allow game balls to pass through at all times. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right-side path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left-side path to pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the game ball through the start gate 41). In response to input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery.

A right other winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the start gate 41 on the right path. The right other winning opening 56 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 56 allows game balls that flow down the right path to enter (game balls that flow down the left path cannot enter).
A right winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the right other winning port 56. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 56 (entry of a game ball into the right other winning port 56). In response to input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize balls.

At the most downstream side of the game area 30, an outlet 58 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls shot into the game area 30 are discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c or by passing through the out hole 58, and flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls entering each of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c are detected by the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 110 disposed in the winning hole, and then guided to the discharge path. Also, the game balls discharged from the outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured of a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is configured to include a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserved display device, a special chart 2 reserved display device, a normal chart reserved display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a probability variation display device, and a time-saving display device. Note that in this embodiment, the probability variation display device is not used.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LEDs 19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED 24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LEDs 27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LEDs 29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED 31 constitutes the special bonus display device, and LED 32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 2 display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special pattern on the special chart 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1, a2 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 correspond to the time when the changing display starts, the time when the changing display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
In addition, the display of the second special pattern on the special chart 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1, a3 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are respectively associated with the time when the changing display starts, the time when the changing display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Then, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
In addition, when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), a small win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The ordinary symbol display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of ordinary symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The ordinary symbol display device displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery based on the stopped ordinary symbol.
Here, the display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device and the display of the performance patterns a4, a5 in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 and the normal map fourth pattern display area A5 correspond to the time when the variable display starts, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
When the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is pending (regular symbol pending number).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left hand path or right hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
As described above, in this embodiment, the probability variation display device is not used.
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control being executed or stopped).

In addition, one or more movable body units (not shown) are provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front side of the decorative part 4b, on the top surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined presentation action in the presentation space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The performance member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the performance member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a performance position. The performance member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the performance member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Also, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the performance member. When the performance member is placed at the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26, blocking light from entering the light receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed at the initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is placed in the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors include a glass frame opening sensor 107 (see Figure 3), an inner frame opening sensor 108 (see Figure 3), a vibration detection sensor 113 (see Figure 3), a radio wave detection sensor 114 (see Figure 3), a magnetic detection sensor 115 (see Figure 3), etc.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In addition, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the game board 11. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases (such as a main board case 250, which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, and source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. The memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.

The ROM 220 (the memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the title and version of a program, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2 in the ROM 220. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the use area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information about an error. The normal game-related area 1 stores a subcommand pointer, etc. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired upon input of a detection signal from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104, a special figure 1 display pattern counter, a special figure 2 display pattern counter, a normal figure display pattern counter, etc.
The non-used area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Furthermore, an unused area M3 of a certain number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in use area m1.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, data stored in the use area M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can proceed (be completed) according to a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to both the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter which generates a winning random number for a normal pattern lottery, a second loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a first special pattern lottery, a third loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a second special pattern lottery, and a fourth loop counter which generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the second loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the third loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter generates reach group random numbers by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 115, etc.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from a RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from a setting key switch 208, etc. are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from the count switch 103, the right prize slot switch 105, the left prize slot switch 106, the out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special diagram 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor.
Specifically, a "1" is set in the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor when a detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (high level), and a "0" is set when no detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from the output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The common signals output from the output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric feature solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of the special electric feature solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V-area solenoid 66, etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from the output port 4 are then input to the source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on a sub-command transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured with a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As described later, the following states of the gaming machine (hereinafter, "gaming machine state") are defined for the pachinko machine 1: a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a seven-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, LED 33 to LED 40 are a display section for the first digit, LED 41 to LED 48 are a display section for the second digit, LED 49 to LED 56 are a display section for the third digit, and LED 57 to LED 64 are a display section for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state occurs, the performance display device 206 alternately displays a first base ratio and a second base ratio at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio for the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous interval (the final base ratio calculated for the previous interval).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top two digits display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

During the setting change state, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, the setting values can be confirmed. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During the occurrence of a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), it is impossible to continue playing the game. During the occurrence of a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operation unit is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to each of the display devices 60 and 206 in response to the common signals (“COM 0 ” to “COM 3 ”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in response to the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in response to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .
As a result, the source driver 250 a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 1 to LED 32 ) included in the main display device 60 .
Furthermore, the source driver 250 b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64 ) included in the performance display device 206 .

Furthermore, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In a test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time-saving control, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in a port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special drawing 1 start port switch 101, the special drawing 2 start port switch 102, the gate switch 104, the count switch 103, the right winning port switch 105, the left winning port switch 106, the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric feature solenoid 64, special electric feature solenoid 65, V-area solenoid 66, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65, 66, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of the dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control commands received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
In addition, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume 410. Specifically, it controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume 410.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The performance control board 300 controls the performance.
The performance control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, etc.
Based on control commands received from the main control board 200, the performance control board 300 controls the display of performance images on various image display devices 31, 32, the lighting of various lamps 20, 21, the output of sound from various speakers 22, and the driving of motors 23 that drive various movable body units.

The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores programs related to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, etc.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, etc.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 determines the performance content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets a performance program (performance control table) corresponding to the determined performance content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to the various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). The digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and outputs the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320.
The illumination controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) in accordance with the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 constituting the movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 is configured to include a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that constitute the movable body units) arranged in the front frame unit 4 according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) are defined as the gaming machine state.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a state of the gaming machine in which game progress is possible.
During the playable state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is permitted, which allows the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
During the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Also, information related to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the setting change state occurs.
During the setting change state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a setting abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from a RAM abnormality, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power off and power on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, the set value is specified to be a value of "0" to "5".
A set value area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the set value area, one of the values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. The probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a probability according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) changes depending on the value set in the setting value area.
The winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is, in order from highest to lowest, as follows: winning probability corresponding to setting value = "5", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "4", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (high winning probability → low winning probability).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area during the setting change state. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game center where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
When the setting change state occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced with a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is confirmed.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state occurs, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state occurs (specifically, while a special low probability state occurs and while time-saving control is stopped).
During the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the starting ports 51, 52 and the other winning ports 56, 57a to 57c). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls shot out).
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. As the predetermined interval, a interval is defined in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval is started in response to the end of the previous interval, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaching the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio as needed (in real time) during each interval.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. An "out ball" refers to a game ball that has been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, an out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the outlet 58 may be regarded as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the outlet 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the starting holes 51, 52 and the other winning holes 56, 57a to 57c.

(Regarding game status)
Next, the game states defined in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player. In the following description, the gaming state when the time-saving control is stopped is referred to as the "normal state." Also, the gaming state when the time-saving control is being executed is referred to as the "time-saving state."
When the time-saving control is being executed (when the time-saving state is occurring), it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 in the normal winning game state described below compared to when the time-saving control is stopped (when the normal state is occurring), which is advantageous for the player.
Specifically, when the time-saving control is being executed (when the time-saving state is occurring), there is a higher probability that the "long opening pattern" described below will be selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a if a "normal hit" is won in the normal pattern lottery, compared to when the time-saving control is stopped (when the normal state is occurring).
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal win" by the normal symbol lottery does not change depending on the game state. In other words, the probability of winning a "normal win" by the normal symbol lottery is the same when the time-saving control is in progress (when the time-saving state is occurring) and when the time-saving control is stopped (when the normal state is occurring). In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win" by the special symbol lottery does not change depending on the game state.

(About the various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
Fig. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the winning types of the normal symbol lottery. Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the winning types of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, Fig. 4(a) shows the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery, Fig. 4(b) shows the winning probability of the first special pattern lottery, and Fig. 4(c) shows the winning probability of the second special pattern lottery. Also, Fig. 5 shows the winning type (type of "normal winning pattern") selected when the "normal winning" is won by the normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, Fig. 6(a) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when the "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery, Fig. 6(b) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when the "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery, and Fig. 6(c) shows the winning type (type of "small winning pattern") selected when the "small winning" is won by the second special pattern lottery.

(Regular design lottery)
In the pachinko machine 1, a regular symbol lottery is executed when a gaming ball passes through a start gate 41.
In this embodiment, only "normal winning" is specified as a result of the normal symbol lottery. Note that, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, "normal winning" and "losing" may be specified.
As shown in FIG. 4(a), in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning/losing judgment), the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" is 1/1. In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal pattern lottery does not change depending on the game state. Note that the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state may be higher than the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 1, a "normal winning pattern 1" and a "normal winning pattern 2" are specified as winning types (types of "normal winning patterns") to be selected when a "normal winning pattern" is won in the normal pattern lottery.
In the regular pattern lottery (regular pattern determination), if you win a "regular hit", the probability of winning "regular hit pattern 1" is 64,880/65,536, and the probability of winning "regular hit pattern 2" is 656/65,536.
When "normal winning pattern 1" is selected, the normal pattern display device displays the stop pattern corresponding to "normal winning pattern 1". Also, when "normal winning pattern 1" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the stop pattern corresponding to "miss pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5. On the other hand, when "normal winning pattern 1" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the stop pattern corresponding to "winning pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5.
Here, the "losing patterns" displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 are, for example, a display mode in which the normal mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the three normal display areas of the normal mini pattern display area A4 has a number (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" that is different from the number (identification information) shown by the normal mini performance pattern a4 displayed in at least one of the normal display areas and the normal mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the other normal display areas, and the normal fourth pattern a5 displayed in the normal fourth pattern display area A5 has an "X" sign.
On the other hand, the "winning patterns" displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 are, for example, displayed in such a manner that the normal mini performance patterns a4 displayed in the three normal display areas of the normal mini pattern display area A4 are all regular mini performance patterns a4 showing the same numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1," and the regular fourth performance pattern a5 displayed in the normal fourth pattern display area A5 shows a "circle."
When the "normal winning pattern 2" is selected, the normal pattern display device displays the stop pattern corresponding to the "normal winning pattern 2". In particular, when the "normal winning pattern 2" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery performed during the normal state, the stop pattern corresponding to the "missing pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5. On the other hand, when the "normal winning pattern 2" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery performed during the time-saving state, the stop pattern corresponding to the "winning pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5.

When a "normal winning"("normal winning pattern 1" or "normal winning pattern 2") is won, a normal winning game state is generated. In the normal winning game state, the normal electric device 52a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, making it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.
In this embodiment, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are defined as types of opening patterns (opening mode/opening/closing mode) of the normal electric device 52a during a normal winning game state.
The "short opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. In the "short opening pattern", the time during which the normal electric device 52a is in an open state during the occurrence of a normal winning game state is shorter than in the "long opening pattern". Specifically, in the "short opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.1 [s].
The "long opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. In the "long opening pattern", the time during which the normal electric device 52a is in an open state during the occurrence of a normal winning game state is longer than in the "short opening pattern". Specifically, in the "long opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 5.0 [s].

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when "normal winning pattern 1" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. On the other hand, when "normal winning pattern 2" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. As a result, when "normal winning" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, if the "normal winning pattern 1" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. On the other hand, if the "normal winning pattern 2" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. As a result, if the "normal winning" is selected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.

(Special design lottery)
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and a second special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52.
In this embodiment, the results of the first special symbol lottery are stipulated as "big win" and "miss". Meanwhile, the results of the second special symbol lottery are stipulated as "big win", "small win", and "miss". In this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery does not win a "small win", and the second special symbol lottery is the only one that can win a "small win". However, the first special symbol lottery may be configured to win a "small win" with a lower probability than the second special symbol lottery.
As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a "big win" is 1/230. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4(c), in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a "big win" is 1/230, and the probability of winning a "small win" is 1/20. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win" by the special symbol lottery does not change depending on the game state, and does not change depending on the setting value. Note that the probability of winning a "big win" by the special symbol lottery may be configured to change depending on the setting value.

As shown in Figure 6 (a), in pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 1,""jackpot pattern 2," and "jackpot pattern 3" are specified as winning types (types of "jackpot pattern") to be selected when a "jackpot" is won in the first special pattern lottery.
In the first special pattern lottery (special pattern determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 1" is 50/100, the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 2" is 45/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 3" is 5/100.
When the "jackpot pattern 1" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 1" is displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 1" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
Here, the "chance pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 is, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance patterns a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same even numbers (identification information), such as "2, 2, 2," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a2 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 shows a "circle."
In addition, the "chance pattern" that is stopped and displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is a display mode in which the main performance patterns a6 stopped and displayed in the three performance pattern display areas are all lined up with main performance patterns a6 that show the same even numbers (identification information), such as "2, 2, 2."

When the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 2" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
When the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 3" is displayed on the special chart 1 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed on the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed on the main performance pattern display area A6.
Here, the "rush pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 is, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance patterns a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a2 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 shows a "circle."
In addition, the "rush pattern" that is stopped and displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is a display mode in which, for example, the main performance patterns a6 stopped and displayed in the three performance pattern display areas are all main performance patterns a6 that show the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1."

As shown in Figure 6 (b), in the pachinko machine 1, the winning types (types of "jackpot patterns") to be selected when a "jackpot" is won through the second special pattern lottery are specified as "jackpot pattern 4,""jackpot pattern 5," and "jackpot pattern 6."
In the second special pattern lottery (special pattern determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 4" is 5/100, the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 5" is 15/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot pattern 6" is 80/100.
When the "jackpot pattern 4" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 4" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 4" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
Here, the "rush pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 is, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance patterns a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1," and the special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 shows a "circle."
When the "jackpot pattern 5" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 5" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 5" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
When the "jackpot pattern 6" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 6" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "jackpot pattern 6" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.

As shown in Figure 6 (c), in the pachinko machine 1, the winning types (types of "small win patterns") to be selected when a "small win" is won in the second special pattern lottery are specified as "small win pattern 1,""small win pattern 2,""small win pattern 3," and "small win pattern 4."
In the second special pattern lottery (special pattern determination), if a "small win" is won, the probability of winning "small win pattern 1" is 5/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 2" is 15/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 3" is 50/100, and the probability of winning "small win pattern 4" is 30/100.
When the "small win pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "small win pattern 1" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "small win pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is stopped and displayed on the main performance pattern display area A6.
When the "small win pattern 2" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "small win pattern 2" is displayed in the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "small win pattern 2" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
When the "small win pattern 3" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "small win pattern 3" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "small win pattern 3" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed on the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed on the main performance pattern display area A6.
When the "small win pattern 4" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "small win pattern 4" is displayed in the special chart 2 display device. Also, when the "small win pattern 4" is selected, the stop pattern corresponding to the "fall pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and the stop pattern corresponding to the "fall pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
Here, the "falling pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 is, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 is a special chart mini performance pattern a1 showing a predetermined combination of numbers (identification information) such as "1, 2, 3," and the special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 is a display mode showing "circle."
In addition, the ``falling pattern'' that is stopped and displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance pattern a6 stopped and displayed in the three performance pattern display areas becomes a main performance pattern a6 that shows a predetermined combination of numbers (identification information), such as ``1, 2, 3.''

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the special symbol 1 display device. Also, if the first special symbol lottery is lost, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the main performance symbol display area A6.
Here, the "losing patterns" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 has a number (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" that is different from the number (identification information) shown by the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in at least one special chart display area and the special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 shows "X".
In addition, the "losing pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in the three performance pattern display areas has a combination of numbers (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" that is different from the combination of numbers (identification information) indicated by the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in at least one of the performance pattern display areas and the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in the other performance pattern display areas.
On the other hand, if the player loses the second special symbol lottery (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the special symbol 2 display device. Also, if the player loses the second special symbol lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the main performance symbol display area A6.
Here, the "losing patterns" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 has a number (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" indicated by the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in at least one special chart display area that is different from the number (identification information) indicated by the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in the other special chart display areas, and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 has a display mode indicating "X".

When the "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 6" are selected, a jackpot game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the big prize hole 55.
During the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of rounds are played. If the "jackpot symbol 1" or the "jackpot symbol 2" is selected, the number of rounds is set to 2. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 3" to the "jackpot symbol 7" are selected, the number of rounds is set to 10.
In addition, if any of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 6" is won, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the execution of that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).

At the end of the big win game state, a predetermined number of time-saving times (first time-saving times and second time-saving times) are set. Then, in response to the end of the big win game state, time-saving control is started according to the set number of time-saving times. Thus, in response to the end of the big win game state, the time-saving state is started.
In this embodiment, when a "normal hit" is won by a normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state, the probability of the "long opening pattern" being selected is higher than during the normal state, which is advantageous to the player. Specifically, when a "normal hit" is won based on a normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1. On the other hand, when a "normal hit" is won based on a normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, a "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.

In this embodiment, a "time-saving end condition 1", a "time-saving end condition 2", and a "time-saving end condition 3" are defined as end conditions for the time-saving control (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving end conditions").
The "time-saving end condition 1" is a condition based on the special symbol lottery (special symbol winning/losing judgment). In other words, the time-saving end condition 1 is a condition based on the number of times the special symbol changes. In this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving period reaches the first time-saving number set at the end of the big win game state, the time-saving end condition 1 is established.
The "number of times special symbols change during time-saving control" is the total number of times the first special symbol change display is executed during time-saving control and the number of times the second special symbol change display is executed during the time-saving control.
When the time-saving end condition 1 is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the variable display of the special pattern that triggered the time-saving end condition 1 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving. At the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 sets the first time-saving number of times according to the combination of the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment, special symbol pattern judgment, special symbol change pattern judgment, etc.) and the winning type (type of winning symbol) as the value of the first time-saving counter. Also, each time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the first time-saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", the time-saving end condition 1 is established and the time-saving control is stopped.
In addition, the time-saving end condition 1 may be established when the number of times of special symbol hit determination (start determination) executed during the time-saving control reaches the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the big win game state. Alternatively, the time-saving end condition 1 may be established when the number of times of the stop display of the special symbol executed during the time-saving control reaches the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the big win game state.

The "time-saving end condition 2" is a condition based on winning a specific "small win pattern" (hereinafter referred to as "fall small win") among "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" by a special pattern lottery (special pattern winning/losing judgment). In this embodiment, the "small win pattern 4" is specified as the "fall small win". In other words, the time-saving end condition 2 is a condition based on the number of times the "fall small win" is won. In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition 2 is established when the number of times the fall small win is won during the time-saving period reaches the second time-saving number (specified number) set at the end of the big win game state.
In the following explanation, the other "small win patterns" among "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4", excluding the "falling small win", will be referred to as "non-falling small win".
The "number of times a small fall win has been won during time-saving control" is the number of times a "small fall win" (= "small win pattern 4") has been won by the second special pattern lottery executed (started) during time-saving control (the number of times a "small fall win" has been determined by the special pattern determination executed during time-saving control).
When the time-saving end condition 2 is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the variable display of the special pattern that triggered the time-saving end condition 2 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times that a small falling win occurs during the time-saving period. At the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 sets the second time-saving number of times according to the combination of the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment, special symbol pattern judgment, special symbol variation pattern judgment, etc.) and the winning type (type of winning symbol) as the value of the second time-saving counter. Also, each time a "small falling win" is judged by the start judgment (special symbol pattern judgment) based on the special symbol game information (in this embodiment, special symbol 2 game information), "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the second time-saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", the time-saving end condition 2 is established and the time-saving control is stopped. As a result, when the number of times a ``fall small hit'' is determined by start judgment (special chart pattern judgment) based on special chart game information (in this embodiment, special chart 2 game information) executed during time-saving control reaches the second time-saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the big hit game state, time-saving end condition 2 is established.

The "time-saving end condition 3" is a condition based on winning a "jackpot" (a jackpot gaming state). In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition 3 is met when a "jackpot" is won (when a jackpot gaming state occurs).
When the time-saving end condition 3 is satisfied, the time-saving control is ended at the end of the stopped display of the "jackpot pattern".

As shown in FIG. 6(a), if the "jackpot symbol 1" is hit and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment is the "normal state", the first time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times] at the end of the jackpot game state. Then, the time-saving control is not started in response to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the normal state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 1" is won and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment is the "time-saving state", the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time] at the end of the jackpot game state. Then, the time-saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time-saving state. In particular, if the "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the start judgment executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state, the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time]. As a result, the time-saving state that starts when the "jackpot pattern 1" is won ends when the "fall small win" is won (becoming the time-saving state (with fall) described later).
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" or the "jackpot pattern 6" is won and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment is the "normal state" or the "time-saving state", at the end of the jackpot game state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times], and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time]. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving control is started. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time-saving state. In particular, if the "jackpot pattern 2" or the "jackpot pattern 6" is won, the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time]. As a result, the time-saving state that starts when the "jackpot pattern 2" or the "jackpot pattern 6" is won is ended when the "fall small win" is won (becoming the time-saving state (with fall) described later).
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 3", "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment is "normal state" or "time-saving state", at the end of the jackpot game state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10000 [times], and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. Then, the time-saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the time-saving state. In particular, if the "jackpot pattern 3", "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won, the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. As a result, the time-saving state that starts when the "jackpot pattern 3", "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won will not end even if the "fall small win" is won (it will become the time-saving state (no fall) described later).

When the "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" are selected, a small win game state is generated. In the small win game state, the special electric device 55a is displaced from a closed state to an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large winning hole 55.
During the occurrence of the small win game state, a predetermined number of small win games are executed. When the "small win pattern 1" to the "small win pattern 4" are won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
In addition, if the "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each small win game ends when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the small win game reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).
In addition, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V-passing state to a V-passing state. At this time, when "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3" are won, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V-passing state to a V-passing state in such a manner that the game ball that entered the large winning opening 55 during the execution of the small win game is easily (possibly) able to pass through the V area. As a result, when "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3" are won, the game ball is easily (possibly) able to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. On the other hand, when "small win pattern 4" (falling small win) is won, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V-passing state to a V-passing state in such a manner that the game ball that entered the large winning opening 55 during the execution of the small win game is difficult (impossible) to pass through the V area. As a result, if the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small win game state is occurring.

If the passage of a game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 during the execution of a small win game is detected through the V area), a large win game state is generated in response to the end of the small win game state.
In this case, if "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3" are won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 9. As a result, 10 rounds will be played, with the small win game being the first round.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 4" (falling small win) is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 2. As a result, the small win game is regarded as the first round game, and 3 rounds are executed.
In addition, when "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" are won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the execution of that round of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 during the execution of a small win game is not detected), a large win game state is not generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), if the "small win pattern 1" or "small win pattern 2" is won, and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special win judgment) is the "normal state" or the "time-saving state", and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] at the end of the big win game state, and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. Then, in response to the end of the big win game state, the time-saving control is started. As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the time-saving state. In particular, if the "small win pattern 1" or "small win pattern 2" is won, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. As a result, the time-saving state that starts when the ``small win pattern 1'' or ``small win pattern 2'' is won will not end even if the ``fall small win'' is won (it will become the time-saving state (no fall) described below).
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 3" is won, and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special win judgment) is the "normal state" or the "time-saving state", and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10000 [times] at the end of the big win game state, and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [times]. Then, the time-saving control is started according to the end of the big win game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the time-saving state. In particular, if the "small win pattern 3" is won, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [times]. As a result, the time-saving state that starts when the "small win pattern 3" is won is ended when the "fall small win" is won (becoming the time-saving state (with fall) described later).
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 4" is won, and the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special win judgment) is the "normal state" or the "time-saving state", and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times] at the end of the big win game state, and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. Then, time-saving control is not started in response to the end of the big win game state. As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the normal state.

(About the limiter function)
Next, the limiter function of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a limiter function.
The "limiter function" is a function that limits the number of times that the control that sets the game state after the end of the big win game state to the time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving granting control") is performed consecutively. In other words, the limiter function is a function that limits the number of times that the time-saving granting control is performed consecutively without inserting the control that sets the game state after the end of the big win game state to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving non-granting control").
In this embodiment, the limiter function makes it possible to continuously execute the time-saving control up to an upper limit of 10,000 times.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a limiter counter that counts the number of consecutive occurrences of time-saving control.
At the end of the "first win", the CPU 210 sets a predetermined initial value (10000 [times] in this embodiment) as the limiter counter value. Here, the "first win" refers to a big win game state that occurs when a "big win" is won based on a start determination executed during the occurrence of a normal state, and a big win game state that occurs when a "small win" is won based on a start determination executed during the occurrence of a normal state and the passage of a game ball through a V area is detected during the occurrence of a small win game state.
Furthermore, at the end of the big win game state, the CPU 210 judges whether or not to start time-saving control according to the combination of the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment and the type of winning symbol. If it is judged that time-saving control should be started, it subtracts "1" from the value of the limiter counter, and judges whether or not the value of the limiter counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0". If it is judged that time-saving control should not be started, it does not subtract from the value of the limiter counter.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0," the limiter function is activated, and the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) is set to 0 [times]. As a result, when the limiter function is activated, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the normal state, even if the condition for making the game state after the end of the jackpot game state the time-saving state is satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has not been updated from "1" to "0," the limiter function is not activated, and the values set in the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter) are maintained. As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the time-saving state.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a "jackpot" is won through a special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery), a jackpot game state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the jackpot opening 55.
Furthermore, when a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, a small win game state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 55. Furthermore, when the passage of the V area by the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, a large win game state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 55.
By making the game ball enter the big prize opening 55, the player can win many prize balls.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability that a jackpot gaming state occurs based on the second special pattern lottery is higher than the probability that a jackpot gaming state occurs based on the first special pattern lottery.
Specifically, in the first special pattern lottery, since a "small win" is not set as a lottery result, a big win gaming state is generated only if a "big win" is won.
On the other hand, in the second special pattern lottery, a "big win" and a "small win" are set as the lottery results, so if a "big win" is won, a big win game state is generated, and if a "small win" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, a big win game state is generated.
In this way, in the second special pattern lottery, a big win gaming state can be generated via a small win gaming state, so the probability of the big win gaming state being generated is higher compared to the first special pattern lottery.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the possibility of a jackpot game state occurring is higher when a chance for drawing the second special symbol is obtained than when a chance for drawing the first special symbol is obtained, which is advantageous for the player.

In order to get a chance to draw the second special symbol, it is necessary to win the "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol lottery and, during the normal symbol playing state, to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 52 when the normal electric device 52a is in the open state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are specified as opening patterns of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. When the "short opening pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. On the other hand, when the "long opening pattern" is selected, it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state.
In particular, when the normal state occurs, if the "normal winning" is won by the normal pattern lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, when the "normal winning" is won by the normal pattern lottery during the normal state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (it becomes difficult to get an opportunity to win the second special pattern lottery) with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, when the time-saving state occurs, if the "normal winning" is selected by the normal pattern lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1 in 1. As a result, when the time-saving state occurs, if the "normal winning" is selected by the normal pattern lottery, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (it becomes easy to get an opportunity to select the second special pattern) with a probability of 1 in 1.

As described above, when the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, even if the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery, it is virtually impossible to get an opportunity to win the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game aiming to win the "jackpot" by the first special pattern lottery in order to shift the game state to the time-saving state. That is, the game ball will be shot toward the left path with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 51. As a result, during the occurrence of the normal state, the game will proceed mainly based on the first special pattern lottery. Then, when the "jackpot pattern 2" or "jackpot pattern 3" is won by the first special pattern lottery, the game state will shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state, if the "normal pattern hit" is selected by the normal pattern lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. This makes it easy to win the second special pattern lottery with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern hit" is selected by the normal pattern lottery. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal pattern lottery in order to win the second special pattern lottery. That is, the game ball will be shot toward the right path with the aim of passing the start gate 41 by the game ball and entering the second start hole 52. As a result, during the time-saving state, the game will proceed mainly with the game based on the second special pattern lottery. If the "long opening pattern" is won based on the normal pattern lottery and also the "jackpot pattern 4" to "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3" are won in the second special pattern lottery, the game state will transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the types of time-saving state are defined as "time-saving state (with fall)" and "time-saving state (without fall)".
The "time-saving state (with fall)" is a type of time-saving state in which the time-saving state ends when the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is won. That is, for the "time-saving state (with fall)", the time-saving end condition 2 is included as the time-saving end condition. Specifically, at the start of the "time-saving state (with fall)", the first time-saving number of times is set to 10000 [times], and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time]. Here, during the occurrence of the time-saving state, it is designed to win a "big win" or a "small win" before the variable display of the special pattern is executed 10000 [times]. At this time, if the "small win" is won, the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is won with a probability of 30/100. As a result, the "time-saving state (with fall)" is essentially ended by winning the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) unless the "big win" or "non-fall small win" is won. In other words, the "time-saving state (with fall)" is a type of time-saving state in which the next win (a "big win" or a "small win without fall") is not guaranteed.
The "time-saving state (no fall)" is a type of time-saving state in which the time-saving state does not end even if the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is won. In other words, the "time-saving state (no fall)" does not include the time-saving end condition 2 as a time-saving end condition. Specifically, at the start of the "time-saving state (no fall)", the first time-saving number of times is set to 10000 [times], and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times]. Here, as described above, during the occurrence of the time-saving state, it is designed to win a "big win" or a "small win" before the variable display of the special pattern is executed 10000 [times]. As a result, the "time-saving state (no fall)" is essentially ended by winning a "big win" or a "non-fall small win". In other words, the "time-saving state (no fall)" is a type of time-saving state in which the next win ("big win" or "non-fall small win") is guaranteed. In this regard, the "time-saving state (no fall)" is more advantageous to the player than the "time-saving state (fall)."
In this embodiment, as described above, during the time-saving state, it is designed to hit a "big win" or a "small win" before the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10,000 times. As a result, the time-saving state ("time-saving state (with fall)" or "time-saving state (without fall)") is not terminated in response to the establishment of the time-saving condition 1.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the "big win pattern 3" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the initial value of the limiter counter is set to 10000 [times]. As a result, when the time-saving state (with fall) occurs, the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is won before the value of the limiter counter becomes "0", and the normal state is transitioned to. Therefore, the limiter function is not actually activated.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) described later is executed, the normal state is generated.
As shown in Figure 7, if the "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will become the normal state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the first number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second number of time-saving times is set to 1 [time], and a "time-saving state (with fall)" is generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the first number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second number of time-saving times is set to 0 [times], and a "time-saving state (no fall)" is generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.

If the "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (with fall)", the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times], and the "time-saving state (no fall)" is generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 6" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "time-saving state (with fall)" is occurring, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the "time-saving state (with fall)" is generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 1" or "small win pattern 2" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (with fall)" and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times], and a "time-saving state (no fall)" is triggered upon the end of the big win gaming state.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (with fall)" and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the "time-saving state (with fall)" is triggered upon the end of the big win gaming state.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 4" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (with fall)" (if the time-saving end condition 2 is established), the "time-saving state (no fall)" is generated according to the end of the variable display of the second special pattern. In addition, if the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is selected, the distribution means is shifted from the non-V-passing state to the V-passing state in such a manner that it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that entered the large winning hole 55 during the execution of the small win game to pass through the V area in each small win game. As a result, if the "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state, and substantially, the big win game state does not occur after the end of the small win game state.

If the "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "time-saving state (no fall)" is occurring, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times], and the "time-saving state (no fall)" is generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 6" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (no fall)", the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the "time-saving state (fall)" is triggered upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 1" or "small win pattern 2" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (no falling)" and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 0 [times], and the "time-saving state (no falling)" is triggered upon the end of the big win gaming state.
On the other hand, if the "small win pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the "time-saving state (no fall)" and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 10,000 [times] and the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and a "time-saving state (fall)" is triggered upon the end of the big win gaming state.
Here, as described above, when the "small win pattern 4" (falling small win) is won, in each small win game, the distribution means is shifted from the non-V passing state to the V passing state in such a manner that it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that entered the large winning port 55 during the execution of the small win game to pass through the V area. As a result, when the "small win pattern 4" (falling small win) is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state, and the big win game state is not actually generated after the end of the small win game state. As a result, when the "small win pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the "time-saving state (no falling)" (when the time-saving end condition 2 is established), the game state does not change and the "time-saving state (no falling)" continues.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 is composed of one byte of high-order data indicating the type of control command and one byte of low-order data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper data and lower data to the performance control board 300 by serial communication. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a special symbol pattern type designation command, a special symbol change pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a regular symbol pattern designation command, a regular symbol change pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a game status designation command, a special symbol reserved number designation command, a regular symbol reserved number designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, etc.
The special symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of the stopping symbol of the special symbol (any of the types of "miss symbol", "big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 6", and "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 4"). The special symbol type designation command is transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Here, the special symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).

The special pattern change pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of change pattern (change pattern number) of the special pattern. The special pattern change pattern designation command designates the change time associated with the change pattern number by designating the change pattern number. The special pattern change pattern designation command designates the change time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the change performance) of the change display (change performance) of the special pattern.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of special pattern variation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different variation time. The special pattern variation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) ("variation pattern n").
The special pattern change pattern designation command is sent when the display of the special pattern change starts.

The special symbol stop command is a command that specifies the stop display of the special symbol. The special symbol stop command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the special symbol stop command is specified to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The normal pattern type designation command is a command to designate the type of the normal pattern stop pattern ("normal pattern 1" or "normal pattern 2"). The normal pattern type designation command is sent at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern.
The normal pattern variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number). The normal pattern variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number.
The normal symbol stop command is a command that specifies the stop display of the normal symbol. The normal symbol stop command is sent when the stop display of the normal symbol starts.
The game state designation command is a command that designates a game state (game state offset value). Here, the "game state offset value" is information that designates a game state. In this embodiment, as the game state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the previous winning pattern flag area, and the value of the post-jackpot spin counter is set. The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, etc.

The special pattern reservation number designation command is a command to designate the reservation number of special patterns. In this embodiment, the special pattern reservation number designation command designates that the reservation number (special pattern 1 reservation number or special pattern 2 reservation number) has increased by "1", that the reservation number (special pattern 1 reservation number or special pattern 2 reservation number) has decreased by "1", the reservation number (special pattern 1 reservation number or special pattern 2 reservation number), etc.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. In other words, the number of reserved special symbols 1 refers to the number of special symbol 1 game information for which start judgment is reserved. Also, the "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device. In other words, the number of reserved special symbols 2 refers to the number of special symbol 2 game information for which start judgment is reserved.
The special symbol reservation number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. Here, the special symbol reservation number designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The normal reserved number designation command is a command that designates the reserved number of normal patterns. In this embodiment, the special reserved number designation command designates that the normal reserved number has increased by "1", that the normal reserved number has decreased by "1", the normal reserved number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved normal symbols" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable display and stop display) of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device. In other words, the number of reserved normal symbols refers to the number of normal symbol game information for which the normal symbol winning/losing judgment is reserved.
The command to specify the number of reserved normal symbols is sent when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the display of changing normal symbols begins, etc.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of a small win game state or a big win game state). The opening designation command designates the type of small win game state or big win game state to start (type of stopping pattern (specifically, any type among "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" and "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 6")). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of a small win game state or a big win game state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small win game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small win game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small win game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small win game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected.

The look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of the special symbol to be stopped (any of the types of "miss symbol,""big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 6," and "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 4"). Here, the look-ahead designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-stroke error. The error designation command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is transmitted at the start of a customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after being powered on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 by serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Also, the dispensing control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of winning balls, etc., is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The number of prize balls designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The number of prize balls designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 are set to specify the occurrence and release of a payout error, the occurrence and release of a full tank error, the occurrence and release of a ball jam error, etc. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and release of various errors are detected.

(Processing Executed on Main Control Board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).
In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hard random number update process. Note that the hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generating circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process that transmits the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 8. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.
In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the RAM clear switch 207 has occurred. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.
In addition, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the setting key switch 208. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.
Furthermore, the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This starts measuring the set wait processing time by the timer counter.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, the process required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 becomes permitted.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.

In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the area other than the setting value area and the game machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) is set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. If it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the on state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the on state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, and the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has not occurred, and the on state of the setting key switch 208 has occurred, and the on state of the inner frame open sensor 108 has occurred.
Here, in step S1-1, if the on state has not occurred for the inner frame open sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, if the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting check state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1- 14. In the setting check state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value check state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error related area, and the normal game related area 1) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-15, power recovery initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization processing, the range set in step S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process at power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process at power recovery, a dispensing command specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a dispensing command output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230 (specifically, the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal play-related area 1, the normal play-related area 2, and the stack area) are cleared (initialized).
This sets a predetermined initial value as the value of each counter for the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the regular chart display pattern counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal or not. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to a playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an on state.
Here, as described above, when an on state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state occurs is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when an on state does not occur for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state does not occur is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stored in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-30, a RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-9 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clear initialization process, the areas in the used area M1 of RAM 230 other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal play-related area 1, the normal play-related area 2, and the stack area) are cleared (initialized).
This sets a predetermined initial value as the value of each counter for the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the regular chart display pattern counter.
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when the power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in an initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 8 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 9. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.

In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning pattern random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.), which are random numbers generated on a program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer. The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers other than winning symbol random numbers (specifically, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the save process at the time of power interruption.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power interruption detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in Fig. 10 during the interruption permitted period of the main loop process. The power cutoff save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power cutoff save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power interruption save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.

In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stopping process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized, which stops the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for recovery determination.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, in which "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restore process is terminated, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts a timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 11 during an interrupt permitted period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.

In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.
In step S4-4, a port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the state of each switch and sensor is obtained.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). Here, "ON state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level). At this time, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the switch/sensor has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor.
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, a "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, a "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the gaming machine state flag stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (detection of ON state or not) of each of the switches 101, 102, 104, and 110. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special display device (special display device 1 and special display device 2) and the operation of the special electric role object 55a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric role object 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are judged, and settings are made according to the judgment results.

In step S4-16, a prize-winning port switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning port switch process, a process (such as updating various counters) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106 (whether or not the switch is on).
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 55 is stored, prize ball control counter 2 in which the number of game balls that have entered the left other prize openings 57a to 57c are stored, prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 56 is stored, prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 51 is stored, and prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 52 is stored.
In the winning port switch processing, it is determined whether or not an on state has been detected for each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, and 106, and if it is determined that an on state has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 1 to 5 corresponding to that switch.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Then, in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when a state is changed from one that designates the launch of the game ball to the left path to one that designates the launch of the game ball to the right path (such as at the start of a small win game state or a big win game state), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1," and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the state changes from one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the right path to one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the left path (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".
In this embodiment, when the "normal state" occurs, the launch position designation flag area is set to "0", and the right-hand hit display device displays information designating the left-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot.
On the other hand, when the "time-saving state,""small hit game state," or "big hit game state" occurs, "1" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and the right-hand hit display device displays information designating the right-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot.

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the out port, information on the occurrence of an error, etc.
The "symbol determination count information" is external information related to the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination count information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the number of times the special symbol stop display is executed reaches a predetermined number.
The "start port information" is external information related to the entry of game balls into the start ports 51 and 52. Each time the CPU 210 detects the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or a data display device).

The "jackpot information" is external information related to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "outlet payout information" is external information related to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached the predetermined value, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information. As a result, the start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. This causes the jackpot information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the out ball count counter for external information. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to a playable state.
Then, if it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value corresponding to a playable state (determined to be a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, or a backup abnormal state), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is also cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the regular display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value of the regular display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value that specifies any of the special game phases among "state before the first large prize opening", "state controlled to open the first large prize opening", "state effective for closing the first large prize opening", "waiting state for the end of opening the first large prize opening", "state before the second large prize opening", "state controlled to open the second large prize opening", "state effective for closing the second large prize opening" and "waiting state for the end of opening the second large prize opening".
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is a value specifying any of the special game phases among "state before first large prize opening", "first large prize opening opening control state", "first large prize opening closing effective state", "first large prize opening opening end waiting state", "state before second large prize opening opening", "second large prize opening opening control state", "second large prize opening closing effective state" and "second large prize opening opening end waiting state", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of jackpot pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is not a value specifying any of the special game phases among ``state before opening of first large prize opening,'' ``first large prize opening opening control state,'' ``first large prize opening closing effective state,'' ``first large prize opening opening end waiting state,'' ``state before opening of second large prize opening,'' ``second large prize opening opening control state,'' ``second large prize opening closing effective state,'' and ``second large prize opening opening end waiting state,'' output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data a to c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal map pending number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.

Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power supply has been restored, the value set in the time-shortening control flag area is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically summing the output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when the power is restored (time-saving control is being executed or stopped), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "- " is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and numbers indicating the set value are displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 display the letter "E," LED41 to LED48 display the letter "r.", and LED57 to LED64 display numbers indicating an error code. LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65, 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65, 66, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. Also, the solenoids 64, 65, 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, information for testing (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution status of time-saving control, etc.) is stored in a port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the program returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the program returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".

In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.
In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. As a result, output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.

In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3") or not. If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4), which will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, the process first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area of the discrimination segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, with regard to the RAM clear switch 207, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values (in this embodiment, "0").
In step S37-7, a set value save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value save process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, with regard to the setting key switch 208, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the on state.
In step S37-9, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the sub-command setting process, a setting-related end command (sub-command) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.
In step S37-11, a RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, the game machine state is set to a playable state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-4. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special chart 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6. If it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.

In step S5-6, a special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, a V passage detection process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress.
Here, the "V effective period" is the period from the start of the first small win game executed during the occurrence of a small win game state to the elapse of the effective time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening after the end of the first small win game.
If it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1" and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process is terminated.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, the process first proceeds to step S6-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a winning random number and a winning random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, a regular map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the regular map reservation counter update process, the value set in the regular map reservation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the regular map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, the normal random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number and the normal winning symbol random number obtained in step S6-1 are stored in the normal game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal game information.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a regular game information storage area in which regular game information is stored.
The regular game play information storage area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game play information.
Memory area 0 stores regular game information during game execution. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store regular game information for which regular win/loss judgment is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, regular game information stored in memory area 1 to memory area 4 is judged to be regular win/loss in the order of priority stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
In addition, in the regular map random number saving process, a regular map reserved number designation command specifying that the regular map reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for special chart 1.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in a special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special chart 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special pattern random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning pattern random number, and a variable pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special pattern identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 1 = "4", and the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 = "1"), and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 is set to "1". However, the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 may be set to "0".
In step S9-5, a special reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special reserved number counter update process, the value set in the special reserved number counter (special reserved number counter 1 or special reserved number counter 2) specified by the address set in the reserved number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special reserved number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in a special game information storage area (special game information storage area or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230 as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2).
The RAM 230 is configured to include a special chart 1 game information storage area in which special chart 1 game information is stored, and a special chart 2 game information storage area in which special chart 2 game information is stored.
The special chart 1 game information memory area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
The memory area 0 stores special game information for the currently playing game. Meanwhile, the memory areas 1 to 4 store special game information for which start determination is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination is executed for the special game information for the currently playing game stored in the memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of priority, starting from the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
The special chart 2 game information memory area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The special game information of the 2nd special symbol during game execution is stored in the memory area 0. Meanwhile, the special game information of the 2nd special symbol for which start judgment is pending is stored in the memory areas 1 to 4. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, the start judgment is executed for the special game information of the 2nd special symbol stored in the memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of priority, starting from the one stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas) among storage areas 1 to 4.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as the special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas) among storage areas 1 to 4.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command for special symbols (reserved number of special symbols 1 or reserved number of special symbols 2) that specifies that the reserved number of special symbols has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a reserved number designation command for special symbols that specifies that the reserved number of special symbols 1 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, a reserved number designation command for special symbols that specifies that the reserved number of special symbols 2 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information 2) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
In addition, for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed. Also, for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stoppage of time-saving control, a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed, and for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of time-saving control, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary judgment process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special pattern lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (pre-special pattern hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big win lottery table in which the big win value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a special symbol small win lottery table in which the small win value of the special symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as the special symbol small win lottery table, a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the pre-special chart hit determination process, first, the pre-special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special jackpot determination process, a special jackpot lottery table is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (pre-special jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.

If the pre-special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," then the pre-special chart small win determination process is executed.
In the pre-special chart small win judgment process, a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to the type of pre-judgment target game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the pre-judgment target game information and the read special chart small win lottery table, it is judged whether or not a "small win" has been won (pre-special chart small win judgment).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the advance special pattern small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "miss."
At this time, as described above, if the reserved type of the pre-determined game information is special chart 1 game information, either a "big hit" or a "miss" is determined (a "small hit" is never determined).
On the other hand, if the reserved type of the pre-determined game information is special chart 2 game information, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

In the advance judgment process, next, a read-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the pre-reading designation command setting process, a pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the following situations and stages (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on a special pattern lottery are defined: "state waiting for special pattern change", "state during special pattern change", "state displaying special pattern", "state before first large prize opening", "first large prize opening opening control state", "first large prize opening closure valid state", "waiting for first large prize opening opening to end", "state before second large prize opening", "second large prize opening opening control state", "second large prize opening closure valid state", and "waiting for second large prize opening opening to end".
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the special game phases "11" is set.
The ROM 220 also stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, which correspond to each special game phase.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase) set in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special chart change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart changing state", the special chart changing process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening pre-opening state", the first large prize opening pre-opening process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening opening control state", the first large prize opening opening control process described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening closure enabled state", the first large prize opening closure control process described later is started, The large prize opening closure enable process is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``first large prize opening open end wait state'', the first large prize opening open end wait process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening pre-open state'', the second large prize opening pre-open process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening open control state'', the second large prize opening open control process described below is started, if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening closure enable state'', the second large prize opening closure enable process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening open end wait state'', the second large prize opening open end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special drawing reservation number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special drawing reservation number update process, the special drawing reservation number (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special drawing reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reservation number counter is "1" or greater.
Then, if the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter is "1" or more, the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value ("1" in this embodiment) that designates a game based on the special pattern 2 game information, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is "0"), the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value designating a game based on the special chart 1 game information (in this embodiment, "0"), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter.
As described above, in this embodiment, start determination is performed for the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information memory area in priority to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information memory area.
In addition, the start determination may be performed in priority to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area over the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area.
In the special reserved number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the post-jackpot spin count counter.

In step S11-4, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special drawings has been decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a special pattern reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special patterns 2 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a special pattern reservation number designation command specifying that the special pattern 1 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-5, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6") or not.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormal state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special chart hit determination process, first, the special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the special symbol jackpot determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the set value area is confirmed, and the special symbol jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" or not (special symbol jackpot determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won.
If the special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," the special chart small win determination process is executed.
In the special symbol small win judgment process, a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read. Then, based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read special symbol small win lottery table, it is judged whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" or not (special symbol small win judgment).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the small jackpot value registered in the special pattern small jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "small jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special chart small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the special symbol small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss."

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination has determined that there has been a "jackpot" (a win).
Then, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a winning symbol selection table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of the "winning symbol" is registered. In addition, as the winning symbol selection table, a first winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 3" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols." On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 6" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols."
In the process of determining the type of the "jackpot symbol", a jackpot symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read jackpot symbol selection table.
At this time, as described above, if the game information stored in the memory area 0 is special pattern 1 game information, any one of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 3" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the memory area 0 is special game information, any one of "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 6" is determined.
On the other hand, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that it is a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a small win pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number and the types of "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4") is registered.
In the process of determining the type of the "small winning symbol", a small winning symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, one of "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4" is determined.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is judged to be a "missing pattern."
Next, the symbol information specifying the type of the determined stop symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-9, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the pattern type designation command setting process, the special pattern type designation command that designates the type of the stopped pattern determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special symbol stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, the stop pattern number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop pattern number lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number value and the stop pattern number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the stopping pattern number lottery tables, a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a big win corresponding to a "big win", a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to a "small win", and a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a loss corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as the lottery tables for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.
In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
When the special symbol hit determination determines that the player has won the jackpot (a prize), the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked, and a lottery table for the stop symbol number at the jackpot corresponding to the result of the check is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop symbol number at the jackpot that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment determines that the player has won a small prize (a win), the system reads out a small prize stop pattern number selection table. Then, the system determines the stop pattern number based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read out small prize stop pattern number selection table.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment results in a "loss" (loss), the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss is read out. Then, the stop pattern number is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss that has been read out.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in a stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special pattern variation pattern determination process, first, a variation pattern table type is selected based on the previous winning pattern, the value of the post-jackpot spin counter, and the value of the limiter counter. Next, a variation pattern table is selected based on the selected variation pattern table type and the type of the stop pattern selected in step S11-8. Next, a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is selected based on the selected variation pattern table and the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0.
The specific method for selecting the type of variation pattern will be described later.

In step S11-12, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a special chart fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special game variable time setting process, first, the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained. Then, the obtained variable time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special chart variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special chart variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special chart display timer.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 1 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, a segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 display counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 2 display counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 2 display counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, a demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special chart stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special chart stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number memory area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-4, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop command setting process, the special figure stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information determination count counter.
In step S12-5, a number-of-times-off management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6, which will be described later.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-8, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, a special chart variable display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special chart variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data update process, when the first special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter is incremented by "1". On the other hand, when the second special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter is incremented by "1".

(Number of cutoffs management process)
Next, the cut-off number management process executed in step S12-5 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the number of cutoff management process.
When the number of times cutoff management process is executed in step S12-5, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is in progress. If it is determined that time-saving control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2. If it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that time-saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time-saving control flag area is "0", it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress.
In step S28-2, a first time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the first time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter.
In step S28-3, it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 1" has been met) and if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter has not been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" has not been met) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-4; if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" has been met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7.

In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not "small win pattern 4" (fall small win) has been won, and if it is determined that "small win pattern 4" has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-5, and if it is determined that "small win pattern 4" has not been won (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
In step S28-5, a second time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the second time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time-saving end condition 2" has been met), and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving end condition 2" has been met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7, and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter has not been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving end condition 2" has not been met) (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).

In step S28-7, a time-saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In the time-saving control stop process, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter). This stops the time-saving control.
In step S28-7, a sub-command setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6). In the sub-command setting process, a sub-command that specifies a change in the game state (stop of the time-saving control) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special map stopped processing)
Next, the special chart stop processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, it first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
In step S13-3, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area, the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) is set to "0", and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This stops the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time-saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S13-4).

In step S13-4, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "big win symbol." In addition, in each second special electric role control table, an opening time, a big prize opening closing effective time, a big prize opening closing time, an ending time, a number of rounds (number of round games), a number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round game), and control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot pattern” determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out second special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "small win pattern" (it is a "miss pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol." In addition, in each first special electric role control table, the opening time, the effective time for closing the large winning hole, the closing time for the large winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of small winning games), the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (small winning game), the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the V-area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small winning game), etc. are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “small winning pattern” determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out first special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-11, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of the "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(First prize opening pre-processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the processing before the first large prize opening is opened.
When the first large prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S14-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of a round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Next, the value of the special electric role winning count counter is set to "0".
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first large prize opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening opening control process.
When the first large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for stopping the power supply is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric device 55a to be controlled to be in a closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of the round (small win game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First big prize winning hole closing validity process)
Next, the first big prize opening closure validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure activation process.
When the first large prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether the value set in the V prize flag area of RAM 230 is "1" or not, and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "1" (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "0" (No), it proceeds to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area, the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) is set to "0", and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This stops the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time-saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol." In addition, in each second special electric role control table, an opening time, a large prize opening closing effective time, a large prize opening closing time, an ending time, a number of rounds (number of rounds of play), a number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round play), and control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch are specified.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “small winning pattern” determined in step S11-5 is read out, and the read out second special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening command setting process, an opening command for specifying the start of a big win gaming state is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-12, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command designating the end of the small win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the first large prize opening)
Next, the first large prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the first large prize opening.
When the first large prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning command setting process, the V non-winning command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-opening process for the second prize winning hole)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the processing before the second large prize opening is opened.
When the second large prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S40-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S40-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of a round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
Next, the value of the special electric winning number counter is set to "0."
In step S40-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second large prize opening control process)
Next, the second large prize opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening opening control process.
When the second large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 8 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the second special electric device 55a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S41-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of a round of play is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second big prize winning hole closing effective process)
Next, the second big prize opening closure validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening closure activation process.
When the second large prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S42-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.

In step S42-3, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command designating the end of the big win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening pre-opening state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the second large prize opening)
Next, the second large prize opening end waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the completion of the second large prize opening.
When the second large prize opening completion wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, a game status setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game status setting process, a game status is set.
Specifically, the game status setting process checks the game status at the time of execution of the start determination (special symbol hit determination) and the type of the stopping symbol ('big hit symbol' or 'small hit symbol').
Then, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state and the type of the stopped symbol is "big hit symbol 1", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "0", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0". This sets that the time-saving control is not to be started.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special winning judgment) is the time-saving state and the type of the stopped pattern is "jackpot pattern 1", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "1", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is "big hit symbol 2", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "1", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is "big hit symbol 3", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is "big hit symbol 4", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is the "big hit symbol 5", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1". This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is the "big hit symbol 6", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "1", and the value of the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1". This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is "small hit symbol 1", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is the "small hit symbol 2", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1". This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is the "small hit symbol 3", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "1", and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1". This sets the start of the time-saving control.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment) is the normal state or the time-saving state, and the type of the stopped symbol is the "small hit symbol 4", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "0", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "0". This sets that the time-saving control is not started.
In the game state setting process, next, "0" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the post-jackpot spin counter. Furthermore, a value designating the stop symbol (winning symbol) determined in step S1-8 is set in the previous winning symbol flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S43-3, it is determined whether the jackpot game state to be ended is a "first hit", and if it is determined that it is a "first hit" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-4, and if it is determined that it is not a "first hit" (No), the process proceeds to step S43-5.
In step S43-4, a limiter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-5. In the limiter setting process, a predetermined initial value (10000 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the limiter counter value.
In step S43-5, it is determined whether or not it was set in step S43-2 to start time-saving control, and if it is determined that it was set to start time-saving control (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-6, and if it is determined that it was not set to start time-saving control (No), the process proceeds to step S43-9.
In step S43-6, a limiter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-7. In the limiter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the limiter counter.
In step S43-7, it is determined whether the value of the limiter counter has been updated from "1" to "0". If it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-8. If it is determined that the value of the limiter counter has not been updated from "1" to "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S43-9.

In step S43-8, a limiter activation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-9. In the limiter activation process, a setting is made not to start the time-shortening control.
Specifically, in the limiter activation process, the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "0", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "0", and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, when the limiter activation process is executed, the time-saving control is not started even if the conditions for starting the time-saving control are satisfied.
In step S43-9, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, the process first proceeds to step S15-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role 55a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, based on the set solenoid data, control of the special electric role solenoid 65 is started, and the special electric role 55a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric service opening/closing switching count counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phases") of a game executed based on a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") are defined: "normal symbol change waiting state", "normal symbol changing state", "normal symbol stop symbol display state", "normal symbol electric device pre-opening state", "normal symbol electric device opening control state", "normal symbol electric device closure active state" and "normal symbol electric device opening end waiting state".
Then, in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) normal games, which correspond to each normal game phase.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.
Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase) set in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map stopped pattern display state", the normal map stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for normal map changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map.
When the map change waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map pending number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map pending number counter.
Next, the memory area in which the regular game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the memory contents of memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are cleared (initialized).
Next, a regular map reserved number designation command specifying that the regular map reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination).
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored.
In this embodiment, the winning values are registered in the regular winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped and the regular winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed so that the winning probability is the same (1/1 in this embodiment).
In the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and a normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined to be a "normal pattern win" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
In the regular drawing pattern determination process, if the regular drawing win/lose determination determines that the drawing is a "regular drawing win" (a win), the type of the "regular drawing winning pattern" is determined (regular drawing pattern determination).
A regular winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the regular winning symbol random number and the type of the "regular winning symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, in the regular winning symbol lottery table, "regular winning symbol 1" and "regular winning symbol 2" are registered as the types of the "regular winning symbol".
In the normal symbol determination process, the type of normal symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the normal symbol random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the normal symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "lose" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "losing pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, a regular symbol type designation command that designates the type of the determined stopping symbol (stopping symbol number) is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-5, a normal pattern variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of the normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when a normal state is occurring, the type of normal map fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined to be the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation time (e.g., 60.0 [s])).
On the other hand, when the time-saving state is occurring, the type (variation pattern number) of the normal fluctuation pattern is determined to be the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation time (e.g., 30.0 [s])).
Here, the second variable time is shorter than the first variable time.
Next, a general fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the determined fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-6, a normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, a variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. The obtained variable time is then set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general map change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. This controls the lighting of the segments corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device.
Next, a predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device, the segments corresponding to the set segment data are controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a general map change display data update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the general map change display data update process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the regular map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol memory area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
Next, a normal stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map suspension)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores normal electric role control tables corresponding to combinations of game states ("normal state" or "time-saving state") and "normal winning symbols"("normal winning symbol 1" or "normal winning symbol 2"). Each normal electric role control table specifies the time before the normal electric role is released, the effective time for closing the normal electric role, the waiting time for the end of the release, the number of times the game is switched on and off, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each switching on and off.
In particular, in the normal electric role control table which is selected when the "normal winning pattern 1" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the normal state is occurring (time-saving control flag area = "0"), a "short opening pattern" is specified as the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 52a while the normal winning game state is occurring.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table which is selected when the "normal winning pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the normal state is occurring (time-saving control flag area = "0"), a "short opening pattern" is specified as the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 52a while the normal winning game state is occurring.

In addition, in the normal electric role control table which is selected when the "normal winning pattern 1" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the time-saving state is occurring (time-saving control flag area = "1"), a "long opening pattern" is specified as the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 52a while the normal winning game state is occurring.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table which is selected when the "normal winning pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the time-saving state is occurring (time-saving control flag area = "1"), a "long opening pattern" is specified as the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 52a while the normal winning game state is occurring.
In the normal electric role control data setting process, a normal electric role control table corresponding to the combination of the current game state (the value set in the time-saving control flag area) and the "normal winning pattern"("normal winning pattern 1" or "normal winning pattern 2") is read out, and the read out normal electric role control table is set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the number of times of switching is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of times of switching is read and set in the normal electric role switching number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening normal electric devices)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric parts.
When the normal electric feature opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process of steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 52a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new normal electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Normal electric feature release control process)
Next, the normal electric feature release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process.
When the normal electric feature release control process is executed in step S19-3, it first proceeds to step S25-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-3. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 38) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, a normal electric component opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric component opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric component 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric feature closure validity process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the opening of normal electric features.
When the normal electric feature release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, it proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total-out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is being reached, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is being reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not being reached (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which the time-saving control is stopped and a jackpot gaming state is not occurring.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added by "2", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the right other winning opening 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the left other winning openings 57a to 57c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached a reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n=integer), where “n” is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to “1”.
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.
In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal winning ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio is to be displayed, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(How to select the special symbol variation pattern)
Next, a method for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol will be described.
FIG. 45 shows the types of variation pattern tables selected for the variation display of special symbols executed after the end of a jackpot gaming state.
Here, Fig. 45(a) shows the type of variation pattern table selected for the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win game state ("first win") that occurs based on the special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state. On the other hand, Fig. 45(b) shows the type of variation pattern table selected for the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win game state that occurs based on the special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state, when the value of the limiter counter is "9998". On the other hand, Fig. 45(c) shows the type of variation pattern table selected for the variation display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win game state that occurs based on the special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state, when the value of the limiter counter is "9997". On the other hand, Figure 45 (d) shows a display of the special pattern variation that is executed after the end of a jackpot game state that occurs based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and shows the type of variation pattern table that is selected when the limiter counter value is between "9996" and "1."

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the type of the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined by the special chart variation pattern determination process (step S11-11). At this time, in the special chart variation pattern determination process, first, the type of the variation pattern table is selected.
In this embodiment, the following fluctuation pattern table types are defined: "Fluctuation pattern table A", "Fluctuation pattern table B", "Fluctuation pattern table C", "Fluctuation pattern table D", and "Fluctuation pattern table E".
"Variation pattern table A" is selected for the variable display of special symbols based on a special symbol drawing executed during the occurrence of a normal state. Meanwhile, "Variation pattern table B", "Variation pattern table D" and "Variation pattern table E" are selected for the variable display of special symbols based on a special symbol drawing executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state (time-saving state (with fall) or time-saving state (without fall)). Meanwhile, "Variation pattern table C" is selected for the variable display of special symbols based on a special symbol drawing executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state (without fall) (it is not selected for the variable display of special symbols based on a special symbol drawing executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state (with fall)).
In addition, the ROM 220 stores a variation pattern table corresponding to each type of stop pattern as a variation pattern table corresponding to each type of variation pattern table. In each variation pattern table, the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is registered.

Specifically, the ROM 220 stores, as fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the "fluctuation pattern table A", a fluctuation pattern table A1 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "miss pattern", a fluctuation pattern table A2 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table A3 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table A4 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 3", a fluctuation pattern table A5 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", a fluctuation pattern table A6 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", a fluctuation pattern table A7 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 6", a fluctuation pattern table A8 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table A9 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table A10 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 3", and a fluctuation pattern table A11 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 4".
In each of the fluctuation pattern tables A1 to A11, a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode A" are registered as fluctuation patterns. That is, when "fluctuation pattern table A" is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode A" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode A" are associated with fluctuation times of 10.0 [s] to 120.0 [s].
When "variation mode A" is selected as the variation pattern, the performance control board 300 executes, as the variation performance, any one of "no-reach variation performance", "normal reach variation performance" and "super reach variation performance" according to the selected variation pattern number.

Here, the "variable effect" is an effect that is executed while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.
In the following explanation, of the three performance pattern display areas contained in the main performance pattern display area A6, the main performance pattern a6 displayed in the left performance pattern display area will be referred to as the "left pattern," the main performance pattern a6 displayed in the central performance pattern display area will be referred to as the "middle pattern," and the main performance pattern a6 displayed in the right performance pattern display area will be referred to as the "right pattern."
In the "non-reach variation performance", a normal variation performance is executed from start to finish. The "normal variation performance" is a display performance in which the main performance pattern a6 is normally displayed in the three performance pattern display areas. Specifically, in the normal variation performance, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are normally displayed in the normal variation performance. In the "normal variation display", the type of the main performance pattern a6 displayed at the lottery result display position in the performance pattern display area is sequentially switched. The "lottery result display position" is the position where the main performance pattern a6 is stopped and displayed. Note that in the non-reach variation performance, the reach variation performance and the development reach performance described later are not executed.
In the "normal reach variation performance", the normal reach variation performance is performed after the normal variation performance is performed according to the start. In the "normal reach variation performance", the main performance pattern a6 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more performance pattern display areas among the three performance pattern display areas, and the combination of the main performance pattern a6 temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more performance pattern display areas is a combination included in the winning pattern ("big win pattern" or "small win pattern"). In the following explanation, the state in which the main performance pattern a6 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination included in the winning pattern in two or more performance pattern display areas is called a "reach state". Specifically, in the normal reach variation performance, the reach state is formed by the left pattern and the right pattern. That is, in the normal reach variation performance, the left pattern and the right pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stopped and displayed are the same type. In addition, in the normal reach variation performance, the normal variation display is continued for the middle pattern. The "temporary stop display" is a display in which one type of main performance symbol a6 is moved (swinging, rotating, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display position of the performance symbol display area and stays there for a predetermined time. Note that in the normal reach variation performance, the development reach performance described later is not executed.
In the "Super Reach Variation Presentation", when the presentation starts, the normal variation presentation is performed, followed by the normal reach variation presentation, and then the development reach presentation is performed. The "development reach presentation" is a display presentation in which the main presentation pattern a6 that forms the reach state is displayed in a reduced size (temporarily stopped display), and a development reach presentation image is displayed on the display screen 31a. The "development reach presentation image" is a presentation image that encourages the winning pattern to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, ROM 220 stores, as fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "Fluctuation Pattern Table B", a fluctuation pattern table B1 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Missing pattern", a fluctuation pattern table B2 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table B3 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table B4 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 3", a fluctuation pattern table B5 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 4", a fluctuation pattern table B6 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 5", a fluctuation pattern table B7 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Big win pattern 6", a fluctuation pattern table B8 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Small win pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table B9 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Small win pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table B10 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Small win pattern 3", and a fluctuation pattern table B11 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "Small win pattern 4".
In each of the fluctuation pattern tables B1 to B11, a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode B" are registered as the fluctuation pattern. That is, when "fluctuation pattern table B" is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode B" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode B" are associated with fluctuation times of 1.5 [s] to 100.0 [s]. Here, the average of the fluctuation times associated with the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode B" is shorter than the average of the fluctuation times associated with the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode A".
When "variation mode B" is selected as the variation pattern, the performance control board 300 executes, as the variation performance, any one of "no-reach variation performance", "normal reach variation performance", and "super reach variation performance" according to the selected variation pattern number.

In addition, the ROM 220 stores, as fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the "fluctuation pattern table C", a fluctuation pattern table C1 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "miss pattern", a fluctuation pattern table C2 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table C3 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table C4 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 3", a fluctuation pattern table C5 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", a fluctuation pattern table C6 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", a fluctuation pattern table C7 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 6", a fluctuation pattern table C8 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table C9 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table C10 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 3", and a fluctuation pattern table C11 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 4".
In each of the fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C11, a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode C" are registered as the fluctuation pattern. That is, when "fluctuation pattern table C" is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode C" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, a fluctuation time of 0.3 [s] is associated with the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode C". Here, the average fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode C" is shorter than the average fluctuation time associated with each of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode A", "fluctuation mode B", "fluctuation mode D" and "fluctuation mode E".
When "variation mode C" is selected as the variation pattern, the performance control board 300 executes "invincible variation performance" or "fall-teasing variation performance A" as the variation performance. In this embodiment, when "variation mode C" is selected as the variation pattern, "invincible variation performance" is usually executed as the variation performance. On the other hand, as described later, when the type of bonus display executed in each "continuous hit" after the fourth consecutive win is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display, "fall-teasing variation performance B" is executed as the variation performance during the variation display of the special pattern executed in each time after the end of the "continuous hit".
The "invincible variation performance" is a variation performance that suggests (notifies) that a time-saving state (no falling) is occurring. In other words, the "invincible variation performance" is a variation performance that suggests (notifies) that the time-saving state will not end even if the "small win pattern 4" is won. Specifically, in the "invincible variation performance", each pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern immediately upon start of the "invincible variation performance". Note that the reach variation performance and the development reach performance are not executed in the "invincible variation performance".
The "fall-teasing variation performance A" is a variation performance that does not suggest (notify) that the time-saving state (no fall) is occurring. In other words, the "fall-teasing variation performance A" is a variation performance that makes (teasing) the player predict which of the time-saving state (no fall) and the time-saving state (fall) is occurring. Specifically, in the "fall-teasing variation performance A", the left pattern, the center pattern, and the right pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order immediately upon start of the "fall-teasing variation performance A", and the results of the match between the ally character and the enemy character are displayed on the display screen 31a. In the "fall-teasing variation performance A", the results of the match between the ally character and the enemy character suggest the results of the special pattern lottery. In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "miss pattern" or a "small win pattern 4", the match result between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "draw (match continues)", and if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 6" or a "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3", the match result between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "ally character wins". Note that the "fall stimulating change performance A" is a change performance with the same content as the "fall stimulating change performance B" described later in appearance. Also, in the "fall stimulating change performance A", reach change performance and development reach performance are not executed.

In addition, the ROM 220 stores, as fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the "fluctuation pattern table D", a fluctuation pattern table D1 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "miss pattern", a fluctuation pattern table D2 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table D3 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table D4 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 3", a fluctuation pattern table D5 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", a fluctuation pattern table D6 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", a fluctuation pattern table D7 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 6", a fluctuation pattern table D8 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table D9 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table D10 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 3", and a fluctuation pattern table D11 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 4".
In each of the fluctuation pattern tables D1 to D11, a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode D" are registered as the fluctuation pattern. That is, when "fluctuation pattern table D" is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode D" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode D" is associated with a fluctuation time of 30.0 [s].
When "variation mode D" is selected as the variation pattern, the performance control board 300 executes "advantageous period entry notification performance" as a variation performance.
In the "advantageous period entry notification effect", the normal fluctuation effect is executed from its start to its end, and an advantageous period entry notification effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a. The "advantageous period entry notification effect image" is an effect image that suggests (notifies) the start of an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the "advantageous period entry notification effect image" displays information that suggests (notifies) that the fluctuation time will be shortened, and information that suggests (notifies) that the probability of the special bonus display appearing as a bonus display, which will be described later, will increase.

In addition, the ROM 220 stores, as fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the "fluctuation pattern table E", a fluctuation pattern table E1 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "miss pattern", a fluctuation pattern table E2 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table E3 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table E4 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 3", a fluctuation pattern table E5 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", a fluctuation pattern table E6 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", a fluctuation pattern table E7 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 6", a fluctuation pattern table E8 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 1", a fluctuation pattern table E9 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 2", a fluctuation pattern table E10 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 3", and a fluctuation pattern table E11 corresponding to the stopping pattern = "small hit pattern 4".
In each of the fluctuation pattern tables E1 to E11, a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode E" are registered as fluctuation patterns. That is, when "fluctuation pattern table E" is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode E" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode E" are associated with fluctuation times of 0.3 [s] to 20.0 [s]. Here, the average of the fluctuation times associated with the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode E" is shorter than the average of the fluctuation times associated with the fluctuation patterns belonging to each of "fluctuation mode A", "fluctuation mode B" and "fluctuation mode D".
When "fluctuation mode E" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the performance control board 300 executes "fall-inducing fluctuation performance B" as the fluctuation performance.
The "fall-teasing variation performance B" is a variation performance that suggests (informs) that a time-saving state (with fall) is occurring. In other words, the "fall-teasing variation performance B" is a variation performance that suggests (informs) that the time-saving state will end when the "small winning pattern 4" is won. Specifically, in the "fall-teasing variation performance B", the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order according to the start of the "fall-teasing variation performance B", and the results of the match between the ally character and the enemy character are displayed on the display screen 31a. At this time, in the "fall-teasing variation performance B", a display performance that teases the results of the match between the ally character and the enemy character (win or lose) is executed according to the change time. Then, in the "fall-teasing variation performance B", the results of the special pattern lottery and whether the time-saving state will end are suggested according to the results of the match between the ally character and the enemy character. In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "miss pattern," the result of the match between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "draw (match continues)," if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state (no fall) is "small win pattern 4," the result of the match between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "draw (match continues)," if the result of the special pattern lottery is "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 6" or "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 3," the result of the match between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "ally character wins," and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state (fall) is "small win pattern 4" (when the time-saving state ends), the result of the match between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed as "ally character loses." Note that in the "fall-inducing change performance B," reach change performance and development reach performance are not executed.

The ROM 220 stores a table type selection table in which the correspondence between the combination of the previous winning symbol and the value of the spin counter after the big win, and the type of the variation pattern table is registered.
As table type selection tables, a table type selection table A, a table type selection table B, a table type selection table C, and a table type selection table D are stored.
Here, in the following description, the jackpot game state that occurs based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is referred to as a "continuous win". Also, the number of consecutive occurrences of the jackpot game state that triggers the transition to the time-saving state is referred to as the "number of consecutive wins". In other words, the number of consecutive wins is the number of consecutive wins that occur during the consecutive win period. The "consecutive win period" is the period from the start of the "first win" that triggers the transition to the time-saving state to the end of the time-saving state based on winning the "small win symbol 4" (falling small win). In other words, the total number of "first wins" and "continuous wins" that occur during the consecutive win period is the number of consecutive wins.

The table type selection table A is referenced when the previous jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state that occurs based on a special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of a normal state. That is, the table type selection table A is referenced when the previous jackpot gaming state is a "first win".
Fig. 45(a) shows the contents of the table type selection table A. As shown in Fig. 45(a), in the table type selection table A, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10000", "variation pattern table A" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 2" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 3" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning pattern = "jackpot pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning pattern = "big win pattern 5" or "small win pattern 2" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning symbol = "big win symbol 6" or "small win symbol 3" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.

As a result, when the previous jackpot game state was a "first jackpot" and the winning symbol associated with the "first jackpot" was a "jackpot symbol 1,""variation pattern table A" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first jackpot."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "first hit" and the winning symbol for the "first hit" was a "jackpot symbol 2," then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first hit."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "first hit" and the winning symbol for the "first hit" was a "jackpot symbol 3," then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first hit."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "first jackpot" and the winning symbol for the "first jackpot" was a "jackpot symbol 4" or a "small jackpot symbol 1," then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first jackpot."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "first jackpot" and the winning symbol for the "first jackpot" was a "jackpot symbol 5" or a "small jackpot symbol 2," then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first jackpot."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "first jackpot" and the winning symbol for the "first jackpot" was a "jackpot symbol 6" or a "small jackpot symbol 3," then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "first jackpot."

Table type selection table B is referenced when the previous jackpot game state is a jackpot game state ("continuous win") that occurred based on a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state, and the value of the limiter counter is "9998".
Fig. 45(b) shows the contents of the table type selection table B. As shown in Fig. 45(b), in the table type selection table B, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 2" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 3" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning pattern = "jackpot pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning symbol = "big win symbol 5" or "small win symbol 2" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning symbol = "big win symbol 6" or "small win symbol 3" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.

As a result, when the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 1", and the limiter counter value was "9998" (i.e., when the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 2", and the limiter counter value was "9998" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit" and the limiter counter value is "9998" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive wins is the second), and the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" is "jackpot symbol 3," then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variable display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit."
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 4" or a "small hit symbol 1", and the limiter counter value is "9998" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 5" or a "small hit symbol 2", and the limiter counter value is "9998" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 6" or a "small hit symbol 3", and the limiter counter value is "9998" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), then "variation pattern table B" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".

Table type selection table C is referenced when the previous jackpot game state is a jackpot game state ("continuous win") that occurred based on a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state, and the value of the limiter counter is "9997".
Fig. 45(c) shows the contents of the table type selection table C. As shown in Fig. 45(c), in the table type selection table C, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1", "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "2" to "10000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "jackpot symbol 2" and the number of spins after the jackpot is "1", "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "jackpot symbol 2" and the number of spins after the jackpot is "2" to "10000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "jackpot symbol 3" and the number of spins after the jackpot is "1", "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "jackpot symbol 3" and the number of spins after the jackpot is "2" to "10000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 4" or "Small Win Symbol 1" and the number of spins after the big win is "1", "Variation Pattern Table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 4" or "Small Win Symbol 1" and the number of spins after the big win is "2" to "10000", "Variation Pattern Table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 5" or "Small Win Symbol 2" and the number of spins after the big win is "1", "Variation Pattern Table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 5" or "Small Win Symbol 2" and the number of spins after the big win is "2" to "10000", "Variation Pattern Table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 6" or "Small Win Symbol 3" and the number of spins after the big win is "1", "Variation Pattern Table D" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table. On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol is "Big Win Symbol 6" or "Small Win Symbol 3" and the number of spins after the big win is "2" to "10000", "Variation Pattern Table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.

As a result, when the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot pattern 1", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., when the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive wins is the third), "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 1", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th hits that is executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot pattern 2", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 2", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th hits that is executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot pattern 3", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 3", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1", and the limiter counter value is "9997" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 4" or "small hit symbol 1", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot pattern 5" or a "small hit pattern 2", and the limiter counter value is "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 6" or a "small hit symbol 3", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot pattern 6" or a "small hit pattern 3", and the limiter counter value is "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table D" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the first special pattern variation display executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 5" or a "small hit symbol 2", and the limiter counter value was "9997" (i.e., the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 2nd to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".

Table type selection table D is referenced when the previous jackpot game state is a jackpot game state ("continuous win") that occurred based on a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of a time-saving state, and the value of the limiter counter is "9996" to "0."
Fig. 45(d) shows the contents of the table type selection table D. As shown in Fig. 45(d), in the table type selection table D, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of the variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 2" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, when the previous winning symbol = "jackpot symbol 3" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning pattern = "jackpot pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" and the number of spins after the jackpot = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning symbol = "big win symbol 5" or "small win symbol 2" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, if the previous winning symbol = "big win symbol 6" or "small win symbol 3" and the number of spins after the big win = "1" to "10,000", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.

As a result, when the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 1", and the limiter counter value is "9996" to "0" (i.e., when the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 2", and the limiter counter value is "9996" to "0" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was "jackpot symbol 3", and the limiter counter value was "9996" to "0" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 4" or a "small hit symbol 1", and the limiter counter value is "9996" to "0" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 5" or a "small hit symbol 2", and the limiter counter value is "9996" to "0" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), then "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".
On the other hand, if the previous jackpot game state was a "continuation hit", the winning symbol for the "continuation hit" was a "jackpot symbol 6" or a "small hit symbol 3", and the limiter counter value is "9996" to "0" (i.e., if the "continuation hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is from the 4th to the 10,000th), then "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table for the variation display of the special symbols for each of the 1st to 10,000th times executed after the end of the "continuation hit".

When selecting the type of the variation pattern table, first, it is determined whether the previous big win game state is a big win game state ("first win") that occurred based on a special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state. Then, if it is determined that the previous big win game state is "first win", the table type selection table A is read out.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the previous jackpot game state was not a "first hit" (it was a "continuation hit"), the limiter counter value is checked. Then, if the limiter counter value is "9998", table type selection table B is read out. On the other hand, if the limiter counter value is "9997", table type selection table C is read out. On the other hand, if the limiter counter value is between "9996" and "0", table type selection table D is read out.
Also, the previous winning symbol is confirmed based on the value of the previous winning symbol flag area, and the number of spins after the big win is confirmed based on the value of the post-big win spin counter. Then, based on the read table type selection table, the type of the variation pattern table corresponding to the confirmed combination of the previous winning symbol and the number of spins after the big win is determined.
In the special pattern variation pattern determination process, next, a variation pattern table is selected. For this, among the variation pattern tables corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern table, a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of the stop pattern determined in step S11-8 is selected, and the selected variation pattern table is read out.
In the special chart variation pattern determination process, next, a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is selected. For this, a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) corresponding to the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 is selected based on the selected variation pattern table.
As a result of the above, the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is selected.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 1, when the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, a shorter variable time is more likely to be selected compared to before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4. As a result, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, it is possible to speed up the progress of the game compared to before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45(a), for the display of the change in the second special pattern for each round executed after the end of the first jackpot game state ("initial hit") where the number of consecutive wins is equal to the number of times in a row, if the winning pattern for the "initial hit" is "jackpot pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1", "change pattern table C" is selected as the type of change pattern table, and if the winning pattern for the "initial hit" is "jackpot pattern 5", "jackpot pattern 6", "small hit pattern 2" or "small hit pattern 3", "change pattern table B" is selected as the type of change pattern table.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(b), with regard to the display of the change in the second special pattern for each round executed after the end of the second jackpot game state ("continuous hit") where the number of consecutive wins is equal to the number of times in a row, if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1", "change pattern table C" is selected as the type of change pattern table, and if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 5", "jackpot pattern 6", "small hit pattern 2" or "small hit pattern 3", "change pattern table B" is selected as the type of change pattern table.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(c), for the variable display of the second special pattern for each time from the second time onwards which is executed after the end of the jackpot game state ("continuous hit") where the number of consecutive wins is the third, if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 4" to "jackpot pattern 6" or "small hit pattern 1" to "small hit pattern 3", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45(d), for the display of the second special pattern that is executed after the end of each jackpot game state ("continuous hit") from the fourth consecutive hit onwards, if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 4", "jackpot pattern 5", "small hit pattern 1" or "small hit pattern 2", "variation pattern table C" is selected as the type of variation pattern table, and if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 6" or "small hit pattern 3", "variation pattern table E" is selected as the type of variation pattern table.
Here, as described above, when "fluctuation pattern table B" is selected, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode B" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, when "fluctuation pattern table C" is selected, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode C" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, when "fluctuation pattern table E" is selected, any one of the fluctuation patterns belonging to "fluctuation mode E" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The average fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode C" is shorter than the average fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode B", and is also shorter than the average fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern belonging to "fluctuation mode E".
As a result, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, the probability that the variation pattern belonging to "variation mode C" is selected as the variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol becomes higher than before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4. Therefore, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, it becomes possible to speed up the progress of the game compared to before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Bonus display)
Next, the bonus display executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 shows the types of bonus displays that are executed when the special symbol lottery is won.
When a jackpot game state occurs, the performance control board 300 executes a bonus display on the display screen 31a. In the bonus display, advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is displayed. In this embodiment, in the bonus display, information that suggests the number of winning balls that the player can obtain is displayed as advantageous information.
The bonus display is executed during the occurrence of a winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state). Specifically, when a "small win" is won by a special symbol lottery and the jackpot game state is generated based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state, the bonus display is executed in response to the detection of the passage of the game ball through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on the winning of a "jackpot" by a special symbol lottery, the bonus display is executed in response to the detection of the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 55 for the first time during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the types of bonus display are defined as a normal bonus display and a special bonus display. The special bonus display is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus display.
The normal bonus display can be executed in either case of when a jackpot game state that transitions to a time-saving state (no fall) occurs, or when a jackpot game state that transitions to a time-saving state (falls) occurs. In other words, the normal bonus display can be executed in either case of when the occurrence of the next jackpot game state is confirmed, or when the occurrence of the next jackpot game state is not confirmed. In addition, in the normal bonus display, information suggesting the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the current winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state) is displayed as advantageous information.
The special bonus display can be executed only when a jackpot gaming state that transitions to a time-saving state (no fall) occurs, and when a jackpot gaming state that transitions to a time-saving state (with fall) occurs. In other words, the special bonus display can be executed only when the occurrence of the next jackpot gaming state is confirmed, and when the occurrence of the next jackpot gaming state is not confirmed, the occurrence of the next jackpot gaming state is confirmed. This suggests to the player that the time-saving state (no fall) will be transitioned to (the occurrence of the next jackpot gaming state is confirmed) when the special bonus display is executed. The special bonus display displays advantageous information such as the number of prize balls the player can win in the current winning game state (jackpot game state or small win game state), and the total number of prize balls the player can win in the next winning game state (jackpot game state or small win game state).

As shown in Fig. 46(a), when a jackpot game state occurs based on winning "jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of a normal state, a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "jackpot pattern 1", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] (for example, the letters "300 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 2" by a special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "jackpot pattern 2", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] (for example, the letters "300 BONUS") is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state occurs based on winning "jackpot pattern 3" by a special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "jackpot pattern 3", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed as a special bonus display.
On the other hand, when a big win game state occurs based on winning "big win pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of a normal state, a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "big win pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a special bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the letters "3000 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a big win game state occurs based on winning "big win pattern 5" or "small win pattern 2" by a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "big win pattern 5" or "small win pattern 2", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the letters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a big win game state occurs based on winning "big win pattern 6" or "small win pattern 3" by a special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern for the "first win" is "big win pattern 6" or "small win pattern 3", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the letters "1500 BONUS") is executed.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9999", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 1" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") that suggests that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 2" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9999", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") that suggests that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9999", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed as a special bonus display.
On the other hand, when a big win game state is generated based on winning "big win pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the value of the limiter counter at the start of the big win game state is "9999", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous win" is "big win pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1" and the value of the limiter counter at the start of the "continuous win" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous win" is a game state in which the number of consecutive wins is the second big win), a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a special bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9999", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9999", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9999" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the second), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 1" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") that suggests that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 2" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 4" or "small jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 4" or "small jackpot pattern 1" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9998", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9998" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state where the number of consecutive hits is the third), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, as a normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") is executed.

As shown in FIG. 46(d), when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 1" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10,000th), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 2" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10,000th), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 300 [balls] (for example, the characters "300 BONUS") is executed as a normal bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10000th), a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed as a special bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 4" or "small jackpot pattern 1" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 4" or "small jackpot pattern 1" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10000th), a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed as a special bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" by a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 5" or "small jackpot pattern 2" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10000th), a special bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 3000 [balls] (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") is executed as a special bonus display.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game state is generated based on winning the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the limit counter value at the start of the jackpot game state is "9997" to "1", a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. That is, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous hit" is the "jackpot pattern 6" or the "small jackpot pattern 3" and the limit counter value at the start of the "continuous hit" is "9997" to "1" (that is, when the "continuous hit" is a jackpot game state with the number of consecutive hits being 4th to 10000th), a normal bonus display is executed as a bonus display. Specifically, a display including information (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") suggesting that the number of prize balls that the player can acquire is 1500 [balls] is executed as a normal bonus display.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 1, when the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, the frequency of the special bonus display is increased compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4. As a result, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the player's sense of expectation is increased compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(a), for a jackpot game state ("first hit") where the number of consecutive wins is 1, if the winning pattern for the "first hit" is "jackpot pattern 1,""jackpot pattern 2,""jackpot pattern 5,""jackpot pattern 6,""small hit pattern 2," or "small hit pattern 3," a normal bonus display is executed as the bonus display, and if the winning pattern for the "first hit" is "jackpot pattern 3,""jackpot pattern 4," or "small hit pattern 1," a special bonus display is executed as the bonus display.
Also, as shown in FIG. 46(b), for a game state in which the number of consecutive wins is equal to the second jackpot ("continuation win"), if the winning pattern for the "continuation win" is "jackpot pattern 1", "jackpot pattern 2", "jackpot pattern 5", "jackpot pattern 6", "small win pattern 2" or "small win pattern 3", a normal bonus display is executed as the bonus display, and if the winning pattern for the "continuation win" is "jackpot pattern 3", "jackpot pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1", a special bonus display is executed as the bonus display.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46(c), in the case of a game state in which the number of consecutive wins is equal to the third jackpot ("continuous win"), if the winning symbol for the "continuous win" is "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 6" or "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3", a normal bonus display is executed as the bonus display.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(d), for each jackpot game state ("continuous hit") from the fourth consecutive hit onwards, if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 1", "jackpot pattern 2", "jackpot pattern 6" or "small hit pattern 3", a normal bonus display is executed as the bonus display, and if the winning pattern for the "continuous hit" is "jackpot pattern 3", "jackpot pattern 4", "jackpot pattern 5", "small hit pattern 1" or "small hit pattern 2", a special bonus display is executed as the bonus display.
As a result, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, the probability of the special bonus display being executed as the bonus display becomes higher compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4. Therefore, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, it becomes possible to increase the frequency at which the player's expectations are raised compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4, and it becomes possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the special bonus display is configured not to be executed consecutively, which suppresses the discrepancy between the number of winning balls that the player can actually obtain and the number of winning balls suggested by the bonus display, and thus makes it possible to suppress misunderstandings by the player.
Specifically, the presentation control board 300 holds predetermined information that specifies the type of bonus display executed during each winning game state (big win game state/small win game state).
In addition, when a "small win" is won by the special pattern lottery and a big win game state is generated based on the detection of the game ball passing through the V area during the small win game state, the performance control board 300 determines to execute a bonus display in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the V area during the small win game state. On the other hand, when a big win game state is generated based on the winning of a "big win" by the special pattern lottery, the performance control board 300 determines to execute a bonus display in response to the detection of the game ball entering the big prize opening 55 for the first time during the big win game state.
Furthermore, when the performance control board 300 decides to execute the bonus display, it selects the type of bonus display to be executed during the current winning game state (big win game state/small win game state). That is, it selects the type of bonus display to be executed during the current winning game state (big win game state/small win game state) according to the contents shown in Figures 46(a) to 46(d).
At this time, if the special bonus display is selected as the type of bonus display to be executed during the current winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state), the type of bonus display executed during the previous winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state) is confirmed based on the stored predetermined information. Then, if it is determined that the type of bonus display executed during the previous winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state) was the special bonus display, the type of bonus display to be executed during the current winning game state (jackpot game state/small win game state) is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of bonus display executed during the previous winning game state (big win game state or small win game state) is a normal bonus display, the type of bonus display executed during the current winning game state (big win game state or small win game state) is maintained as the special bonus display.

Next, a specific example of the transition of the bonus display during a consecutive win period will be described.
First, the transition of the bonus display in the first example will be described.
In the first example, the winning pattern for the "first hit" (number of consecutive hits = first big hit game state) is "big hit pattern 2," and the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" of the second consecutive hit is "small hit pattern 1."
That is, in the first example, during the occurrence of a jackpot game state related to the "first hit", in response to the first detection of a game ball entering the jackpot opening 55, a normal bonus display is executed. At this time, as the normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting the number of prize balls that the player can acquire based on the "first hit" = 300 [balls] (for example, the letters "300 BONUS") is executed.
In addition, a time-saving state (with falling) starts in response to the end of the "first win". Then, for the variable display of the special symbols executed for each time after the end of the "first win", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table B". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbols executed for each time after the end of the "first win", one of the "non-reach variable display", "normal reach variable display" and "super reach variable display" is executed as the variable display.
Thereafter, during the occurrence of the small win game state related to the "continuous win" of the number of consecutive wins=2, a special bonus display is executed in response to the detection of the passage of the game ball through the V area. Here, when the winning pattern related to the "continuous win" of the number of consecutive wins=2 is "small win pattern 1", the time-saving state (no falling) is started in response to the end of the "continuous win", and the occurrence of the next big win game state is confirmed. Therefore, as the special bonus display, a display including information (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") suggesting the total of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the winning game state of the number of consecutive wins=2 (small win game state/big win game state)=1500 [balls] and the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the next winning game state (small win game state/big win game state)=1500 [balls], which is 3000 [balls], is executed.
In addition, a time-saving state (no falling) starts in response to the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count. Then, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count, a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count, an "invincible variable display" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (no falling) is occurring.

Next, the transition of the bonus display according to the second example will be described.
In the second example, the winning pattern for the "first hit" (number of consecutive hits = first jackpot game state) is "jackpot pattern 3," and the winning pattern for the "continuation hit" for the second consecutive hit is "small hit pattern 1."
That is, in the second example, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state related to the "first hit", in response to the first detection of the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 55, a special bonus display is executed. Here, when the winning symbol related to the "first hit" is "jackpot symbol 3", in response to the end of the "first hit", a time-saving state (no falling) is started, and the occurrence of the next jackpot game state is confirmed. Therefore, as the special bonus display, a display including information (for example, the characters "3000 BONUS") suggesting the total of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the "first hit" = 1500 [balls] and the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the next hit game state (small hit game state/jackpot game state) = 1500 [balls] = 3000 [balls] is executed.
In addition, a time-saving state (no falling) starts in response to the end of the "first win". Then, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the "first win", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the "first win", an "invincible variable effect" is executed as a variable effect, suggesting that a time-saving state (no falling) is occurring.
Thereafter, in the occurrence of a small win game state related to the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive number of times, a bonus display is executed in response to the detection of the passage of the game ball through the V region. At this time, when the winning pattern related to the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive number of times is "small win pattern 1", a special bonus display is usually selected as the type of bonus display. However, in this example, the type of bonus display executed during the occurrence of the previous winning game state (big win game state/small win game state) is the special bonus display. As a result, the type of bonus display executed during the occurrence of a small win game state related to the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive number of times is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display. Then, as the normal bonus display, a display including information (for example, the characters "1500 BONUS") suggesting the number of prize balls that the player can acquire based on the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive number of times is executed.
Here, when the winning symbol for the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count is "small hit symbol 1", the time-saving state (no falling) starts according to the end of the "continuous hit", and the occurrence of the next big hit game state is confirmed. Then, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the consecutive win count = second "continuous hit", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". Here, during the consecutive win period, usually, during the occurrence of a winning game state (small hit game state/big hit game state), after the special bonus display is executed, a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C" after the end of the winning game state, and an "invincible variable effect" is executed as a variable effect. As a result, when the type of bonus display executed in the "continuous hit" of the number of consecutive wins=2 is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display, even though the normal bonus display is executed during the occurrence of the winning game state (small win game state/big win game state), after the end of the winning game state, a variation pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C", and the "invincible variation effect" is executed as the variation effect, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the type of bonus display executed in the "continuous hit" of the number of consecutive wins=2 is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display, during the occurrence of the big win game state of the number of consecutive wins=2 (during the round game or during the ending period), a promotion effect is executed. The promotion effect is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a time-saving state (no fall) will occur. In other words, the promotion effect is an effect that suggests that the occurrence of the next big win game state has been confirmed. Then, during the occurrence of the consecutive win game state of the second big win, after the promotion performance is executed, the change pattern is selected based on the "change pattern table C" after the end of the winning game state, and the "invincible change performance" is executed as the change performance. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, a time-saving state (no falling) starts in response to the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count. Then, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count, a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the second "continuous hit" of the consecutive win count, an "invincible variable display" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (no falling) is occurring.

Next, the transition of the bonus display according to the third example will be described.
In the third example, the winning symbol for each "continuous win" from the fourth consecutive win onwards is "small win symbol 3".
That is, in the third example, in the occurrence of a small win game state related to the "continuous hit" of each of the consecutive wins from the fourth time onward, in response to the detection of the passage of the game ball through the V area, a normal bonus display is executed. At this time, as the normal bonus display, a display including information suggesting the number of prize balls that the player can obtain based on the "continuous hit" = 1500 [balls] (for example, the letters "1500 BONUS") is executed.
In addition, a time-saving state (with fall) is started according to the end of each "continuous hit" of the fourth consecutive win or later. Then, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of each "continuous hit" of the fourth consecutive win or later, a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table E". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of each "continuous hit" of the fourth consecutive win or later, a "fall-inducing variable display B" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (with fall) is occurring.

Next, the transition of the bonus display according to the fourth example will be described.
In the fourth example, the winning symbols for the "continuation hit" of the predetermined number of times after the fourth consecutive win are "small hit symbol 1", "small hit symbol 2", "big hit symbol 4" or "big hit symbol 5", and the winning symbols for the "continuation hit" of the next predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "specific number") are "small hit symbol 1", "small hit symbol 2", "big hit symbol 4" or "big hit symbol 5". In addition, during the occurrence of the previous hit game state (small hit game state/big hit game state) of the "continuation value" of the predetermined number of times, the normal bonus display is executed.
That is, in the fourth example, during the occurrence of a game state (small win game state/jackpot game state) following a predetermined number of "continuous hits," a special bonus display is executed in response to detection of the passage of the game ball through the V area, or detection of the game ball first entering the large prize opening 55. Here, if the winning symbol for the predetermined number of "continuous hits" is "small hit symbol 1,""small hit symbol 2,""jackpot symbol 4," or "jackpot symbol 5," a time-saving state (no falling) is initiated in response to the end of the "continuous hit," and the occurrence of the next jackpot game state is determined. For this reason, as a special bonus display, a display is executed which includes information suggesting the total number of prize balls that a player can obtain in a predetermined winning game state (small win game state/jackpot game state) = 1500 [balls] and the number of prize balls that a player can obtain in a specific winning game state (small win game state/jackpot game state) = 1500 [balls], which is 3000 [balls] (for example, the letters "3000 BONUS")
In addition, a time-saving state (no falling) is initiated in response to the end of a predetermined number of "continuous hits". Then, for the variable display of the special symbols executed for each time after the end of a predetermined number of "continuous hits", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbols executed for each time after the end of a predetermined number of "continuous hits", an "invincible variable display" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (no falling) is occurring.
Thereafter, during the occurrence of a winning game state (small winning game state/big winning game state) related to the specific "continuation win", when the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected, or when the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 55 is detected for the first time, a bonus display is executed. At this time, when the winning pattern related to the specific "continuation win" is "small winning pattern 1", "small winning pattern 2", "big winning pattern 4" or "big winning pattern 5", the special bonus display is usually selected as the type of bonus display. However, in this example, the type of bonus display executed during the occurrence of the previous (predetermined) winning game state (big winning game state/small winning game state) is the special bonus display. As a result, the type of bonus display executed during the occurrence of the small winning game state related to the specific "continuation win" is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display. Then, as a normal bonus display, a display is executed including information (for example, the letters "1500 BONUS") suggesting the number of prize balls that the player can acquire based on a specific "continuation hit" = 1500 [balls].
Here, for each "continuous hit" after the fourth consecutive win, if the winning symbol for the "continuous hit" is "small hit symbol 3" or "big hit symbol 6", a normal bonus display is executed in the "continuous hit". After that, a time-saving state (with fall) is started according to the end of the "continuous hit". In addition, for the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the "continuous hit", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table E". As a result, during the variable display of the special symbol for each time executed after the end of the "continuous hit", a "fall-inducing variable display B" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (with fall) is occurring.
In other words, when the normal bonus display is executed in each "continuous hit" from the fourth consecutive hit onwards, during the variable display of the special pattern executed for each time after the end of the "continuous hit", a "fall-inducing variable display B" is executed as a variable display, suggesting that a time-saving state (with fall) is occurring.
On the other hand, if the type of bonus display executed in a specific "continuation hit" is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display, the normal bonus display is executed in the "continuation hit". After that, the time-saving state (no fall) starts according to the end of the "continuation hit". In addition, for the variable display of the special symbol executed each time after the end of the "continuation hit", a variable pattern is selected based on the "variation pattern table C". In this case, even if the normal bonus display is executed in the specific "continuation hit", if the "invincible variable display" is executed as the variable display during the variable display of the special symbol executed each time after the end of the specific "continuation hit", the player may feel uncomfortable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the type of bonus display executed in each "continuous hit" after the fourth consecutive win is changed from the special bonus display to the normal bonus display, during the variable display of the special symbol executed in each round after the end of the "continuous hit", a "fall-teasing variable performance A" is executed as a variable performance. Here, as described above, the "fall-teasing variable performance A" is a variable performance with the same content as the "fall-teasing variable performance B" in appearance.
In other words, when the type of bonus display executed during a specific "continuation hit" is changed from a special bonus display to a normal bonus display, during the changing display of the special pattern executed for each time after the end of the "continuation hit", a "fall-inducing changing effect A" is executed as a changing effect.
This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(Function of Pachinko Machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times, the probability that the variation pattern belonging to "variation mode C" is selected as the variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol becomes higher than before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times. As a result, when the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times, a short variation time is more likely to be selected than before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times. Therefore, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times, it is possible to speed up the progress of the game compared to before the number of consecutive wins reaches 4 times, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
Here, if the configuration only makes it easier for a shorter variable time to be selected when the number of consecutive wins reaches four compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached four, it may be possible to increase the enjoyment of the game, but there is a risk that it may not be possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, the probability of the special bonus display being executed as the bonus display becomes higher compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4. As a result, when the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, the frequency of the special bonus display increasing compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4. Therefore, after the number of consecutive wins reaches 4, it becomes possible to increase the frequency at which the player's expectations are increased compared to before the number of consecutive wins reached 4, and it becomes possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Modification)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, when a "first hit" is won, the value of the limiter counter is set to a value that, in theory (probability wise), will never be reached (specifically, 10,000 [times]).
However, the limiter counter may be configured to be set to ∞ [times] when the "first hit" is won.
In the above embodiment, when the "first win" is won, a predetermined initial value is set as the limiter counter value at the end of the big win game state (specifically, at the end of the ending period (ending time)). Also, when the start of time-saving control is set, "1" is subtracted from the limiter counter value at the end of the big win game state (specifically, at the end of the ending period (ending time)), and when the limiter counter value is subtracted from "1" to "0", the limiter function is activated and the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) is set to 0 [times].
However, when the "first hit" is won, a predetermined initial value may be set as the limiter counter value at the start of the jackpot game state (for example, at the start of the opening period (opening time)). Also, when the start of time-saving control is set, "1" is subtracted from the limiter counter value at the start of the jackpot game state (for example, at the start of the opening period (opening time)), and when the limiter counter value is subtracted from "1" to "0", the limiter function may be activated and the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter) may be set to 0 [times].
In addition, in the above embodiment, the upper limit of the value of the spin count counter after a jackpot is set to a value that will never be reached in theory (specifically, 10,000 [times]).
However, the upper limit of the post-jackpot spin counter value may be set to ∞ [times].
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the timing at which the promotion effect is executed may be determined by lottery to be either during a round of play or during the ending period.

1 Pachinko machine 31a Display screen 41 Start gate 51 First start gate 52 Second start gate 55 Big prize gate 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board

Claims (1)

A game determination means for executing a game determination;
A display control means for executing a variable display of the symbol information according to a variable time corresponding to the result of the game judgment;
A specific game state control means for generating a specific game state in which a specific ball entrance is opened and closed ,
When the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, a short variable time is more likely to be selected than before the number of consecutive occurrences of the specific game state reaches the predetermined number , and the frequency of appearance of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is improved.
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous information is information suggesting the number of prize balls a player is expected to win by performing the specific gaming state multiple times .

Images